3441 lines
1.1 MiB
3441 lines
1.1 MiB
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
|
||
ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of Acts<br><br>1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)<br>2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)<br>3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)<br>4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)<br>5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)<br>6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)<br><br>Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.<br><br>### What is the book of Acts about?<br><br>The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”<br><br>### Who wrote the book of Acts?<br><br>The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.<br><br>Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the church?<br><br>The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.<br><br>### The kingdom of God<br><br>The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts<br><br>### “to the same”<br><br>The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.<br><br>### “in/to/into the temple”<br><br>Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?<br><br>The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.<br><br>First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:<br>- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”<br>- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”<br>- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”<br>- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”<br><br>Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:<br>- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”<br>- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”<br>- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”<br>- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”<br>- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).<br>- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”<br>- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The Ascension<br><br>This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])<br><br>### Baptism<br><br>Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”<br><br>Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Long sentence<br><br>As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### The details of the death of Judas<br><br>There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.<br><br>It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.<br><br>But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.<br><br>### The 12 disciples<br><br>There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.<br><br>All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.<br><br>Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
|
||
ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
|
||
ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus **Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a001 figs-idiom περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach Luke is using the word **began** in an idiomatic way to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (he had been working as a carpenter), but he then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In many languages it would not be necessary to translate the word **began.** Alternate translation: “about all that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a002 figs-hyperbole περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 a003 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until that day when While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 a424 figs-explicit ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
|
||
ACT 1 3 dup3 figs-explicit μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν 1 after he had suffered This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a005 figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 with many proofs The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 yc16 figs-explicit δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων 1 appearing to them for 40 days and speaking While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 things concerning the kingdom of God See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 vb7g figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 not to depart from Jerusalem The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 a008 translate-names Ἱεροσολύμων 1 Jerusalem **Jerusalem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 sg4h figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the promise of the Father Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 a009 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 of the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 tj6r figs-quotations ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου 1 which you heard from me In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 d3kr figs-you ἠκούσατέ 1 you heard Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 uu4k translate-names Ἰωάννης 1 John **John** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 fnq5 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 a075 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 dzj1 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and if your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 a010 figs-litotes οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας 1 after these not many days Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 n9wt writing-pronouns οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 1 They therefore having assembled, they were asking him In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 a011 figs-idiom εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 f7uj figs-abstractnouns εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel f your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 a252 translate-names τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel **Israel** is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a012 figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι 1 It is not for you to know Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 y1fu figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 the times or the seasons The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a013 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a014 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 by his own authority If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 ld4k grammar-connect-logic-result λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες 1 you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 a015 figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 power If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **power**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 a016 translate-names Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ 1 Jerusalem … Judea … Samaria **Jerusalem** is the name of a city, and **Judea** and **Samaria** are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 vb4m figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 to the end of the earth This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 e1q1 figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 as they were looking Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 l1cq figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 he was raised up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 ug58 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 from their eyes Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 enu1 figs-explicit ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 they were looking intently into heaven Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a017 figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο 1 and behold, two men Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a018 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 and Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a019 figs-explicit ἄνδρες δύο 1 two men These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a020 ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς 1 white clothes In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
|
||
ACT 1 11 a021 figs-explicit οἳ…εἶπαν 1 they said This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a022 figs-verbs οἳ…εἶπαν 1 they said If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 gpg3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galileans This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a023 translate-names ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galileans **Galileans** are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a024 figs-rquestion τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 why do you stand looking into heaven? The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a025 figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 why do you stand looking This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a026 ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν 1 who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky”
|
||
ACT 1 11 a027 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 who has been taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 cue7 ὃν τρόπον 1 in which manner Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
|
||
ACT 1 12 x2nk writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a028 figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a029 translate-names ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet **Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a030 figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 p19g figs-explicit Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 vis2 figs-explicit ὅτε εἰσῆλθον 1 when they arrived The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 zt12 translate-unknown εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες 1 they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a031 translate-names Πέτρος…Ἰωάννης…Ἰάκωβος…Ἀνδρέας…Φίλιππος…Θωμᾶς…Βαρθολομαῖος…Μαθθαῖος 1 Peter … John … James … Andrew … Philip … Thomas … Bartholomew … Matthew These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a032 figs-idiom Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου 1 James of Alphaeus … Judas of James These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a033 translate-names Ἰάκωβος…Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας…Ἰακώβου 1 James … Alphaeus … Judas … James These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a034 translate-names Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς 1 Simon the Zealot **Simon** is the name of a man, and **Zealot** is another name by which he was known. (1) **Zealot** could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) **Zealot** could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
|
||
ACT 1 14 z6cf ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 1 14 a035 figs-explicit γυναιξὶν 1 the women Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in [Luke 8:2–3](../luk/08/02.md) and [23:49](../luk/23/49.md). Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 14 a036 translate-names Μαρία 1 Mary **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 14 a037 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 il8w writing-newevent καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 And in those days Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 cup2 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a038 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 having stood up Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 liz1 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a039 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 tl5m writing-background ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι 1 and the multitude of names to the same was about 120 Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of names Luke is using the term **names** figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 1 16 a042 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a043 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a044 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers If you decide to retain the metaphor of **brothers**, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a046 προεῖπε 1 spoke before Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
|
||
ACT 1 16 f3um figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 by the mouth of David Peter is using the word **mouth** figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a047 translate-names Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα 1 David … Judas **David** and **Judas** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a048 figs-synecdoche τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus Peter is using the act of guiding **the ones who arrested Jesus** to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 q73y grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a049 figs-parallelism κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a050 κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us Peter is using the term **numbered** in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
|
||
ACT 1 17 a051 figs-activepassive κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 tmv2 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 with us Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word **us** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **us** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a052 figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 a share of this ministry Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 tmv1 writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Now indeed Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 dd58 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 kg3q figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
|
||
ACT 1 18 a055 figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 all his entrails were poured out If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 a056 γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem The verb form is not passive here, since **known** is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make **it** the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
|
||
ACT 1 19 a057 figs-hyperbole γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 a058 figs-activepassive ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο 1 Therefore that field was called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 mxf3 translate-transliterate Ἁκελδαμάχ 1 Akeldama **Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 mz13 figs-quotemarks γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 d7pk figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 ip5w figs-activepassive γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν 1 it is written in the book of Psalms If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 mc45 figs-parallelism γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 chq4 figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it The word **habitation** likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 lsm2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος 1 Let his habitation be made desolate If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation become desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 a059 τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 Let another take his overseership The word **overseership** refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in [1 Timothy 3:1](../1ti/03/01.md). Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
|
||
ACT 1 21 t916 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 1 21 xz69 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς 1 us … us In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 21 zuf7 figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 beginning from the baptism of John If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a060 translate-names Ἰωάννου 1 John **John** is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a062 writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 he was taken up … his resurrection The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a063 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν 1 from us … with us When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 mrx7 figs-nominaladj ἕνα τούτων 1 one of these is Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 g3n9 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his resurrection If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 lz7y writing-pronouns ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a064 figs-nominaladj ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a065 translate-symaction ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a066 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρσαββᾶν…Ἰοῦστος 1 Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus **Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 s1ff figs-activepassive τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος 1 the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a067 translate-names Μαθθίαν 1 Matthias **Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a068 translate-versebridge 0 Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a069 figs-hendiadys προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 zd1f figs-synecdoche προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a070 σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
|
||
ACT 1 24 se6m figs-metaphor σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a071 figs-youformal σὺ Κύριε 1 you, Lord The word **you** is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a072 figs-nominaladj ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα 1 which one from these two The person who is praying is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 mg47 figs-hendiadys λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς 1 to take this place of ministry and apostleship The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **apostleship** identifies what kind of **ministry** this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 ryv6 figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας 1 from which Judas turned aside The expression **turned aside** figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 tx6n figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον 1 to go to his own place This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 a073 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 r84c writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 a074 translate-unknown ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 w4ph figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 he was chosen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pentecost<br><br>The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.<br><br>### Last days<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])<br><br>### The prophecy of Joel<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>### Baptize<br><br>In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### Wonders and signs<br><br>These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “You killed” (2:23)<br><br>The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### Poetry<br><br>The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
|
||
ACT 2 1 i4sa writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a076 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a425 figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 x075 translate-names τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 the day of Pentecost **Pentecost** is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 i4sb writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 they were all together Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 2 2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself.
|
||
ACT 2 2 a078 figs-simile ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 as of a strong wind being borne along Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 jec5 figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 a strong wind being borne along Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 a079 figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 it filled the whole house Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 t4y4 ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 the whole house Luke may be using the word translated **house** in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
|
||
ACT 2 2 a080 figs-idiom οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι 1 where they were sitting Luke may be using the term **sitting** idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 3 re3t γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός 1 tongues as if of fire This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in [Isaiah 5:24](../isa/05/24.md), for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
|
||
ACT 2 3 xtk4 διαμεριζόμεναι 1 distributing themselves This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
|
||
ACT 2 3 a081 writing-pronouns ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 3 a082 figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them Luke is using the word **sat** figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 v7hi figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a251 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a083 ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues Luke is using the word **tongues** in one of its specific senses to mean “languages.” Alternate translation: “they began to speak in other languages”
|
||
ACT 2 4 nr9f figs-explicit ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a084 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 as the Spirit was giving them to speak out Here, **giving** has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
|
||
ACT 2 4 a085 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 as the Spirit was giving them to speak out The word translated **to speak out** means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
|
||
ACT 2 5 dz1l grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 yft2 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 godly men Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 stq9 figs-hyperbole παντὸς ἔθνους 1 every nation The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 a086 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 6 u9hc writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 each one was hearing them speaking in his own language The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 m8kd figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were … amazed and were marveling The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 a087 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were all amazed and were marveling The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 a088 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 wnk2 figs-rquestion οὐχ…ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι 1 are not all these who are speaking Galileans? The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 a089 translate-names Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Galileans See how you translated the name **Galileans** in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 hzm8 figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν? 1 And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born? The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a090 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a091 figs-explicit πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος 1 how are we hearing, each Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a092 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν 1 we … our The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 wb5t figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born The speakers say figuratively that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a093 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 9 f1ve translate-names Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται 1 Parthians … Medes … Elamites These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 9 dm23 translate-names τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν 1 Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 10 tmb4 translate-names Φρυγίαν…Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον…Λιβύης 1 Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 10 a094 translate-names Κυρήνην 1 Cyrene **Cyrene** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 10 a095 translate-names οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι 1 Romans visiting Here, **Romans** is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 11 w8jy Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι 1 both Jews and proselytes The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
|
||
ACT 2 11 jnp7 translate-names Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες 1 Cretans and Arabians These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 11 a096 γλώσσαις 1 tongues As in [2:4](../02/04.md), here the word **tongues** has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages”
|
||
ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the great things of God The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 fg59 figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 jj1n translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 with sweet wine This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 k5hr translate-symaction σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ 1 But Peter, having stood with the Eleven, raised up his voice Peter **stood** to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles **stood** with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 c919 figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἕνδεκα 1 the eleven Luke is using the adjective **eleven** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 d9tb figs-idiom ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς 1 raised up his voice and spoke out to them The idiom **raised up his voice** means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a102 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Men, Jews This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a103 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Men, Jews Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a104 figs-explicit οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες 1 all who are inhabiting Jerusalem This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 ei5j τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 let this be known to you This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
|
||
ACT 2 14 a105 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 and Peter uses the word translated **and** to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 qp16 figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 take my words into your ears Peter is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a106 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a107 writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a108 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 For Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a109 ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
|
||
ACT 2 15 h28q figs-explicit ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a110 translate-ordinal ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 the third hour of the day If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 2 16 f9hz figs-activepassive τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 16 ktw9 figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a111 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” The material in [2:17–21](../02/17.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase **God says** to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a112 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 ijl8 καὶ ἔσται 1 And it will be Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
|
||
ACT 2 17 a113 ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
|
||
ACT 2 17 u2d1 figs-metaphor ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 I will pour out from my Spirit God says figuratively that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a114 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 on all flesh God refers figuratively to **flesh** to mean people, by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a115 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται 1 and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a116 figs-exclusive ὑμῶν -1 your If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a117 figs-gendernotations οἱ νεανίσκοι…οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 young men … old men God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 uwd7 figs-quotations καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν 1 And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 nd34 ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου 1 on my male servants and on my female servants If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
|
||
ACT 2 18 a118 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, **days** idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 wz2i figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ…ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 19 a119 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ δώσω 1 And I will give You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 19 a120 δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα 1 I will give wonders … and signs Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
|
||
ACT 2 19 a121 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω 1 in the heaven above Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
|
||
ACT 2 19 p5zi figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 vapor of smoke Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 ylv7 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a124 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a125 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 f34k figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 swb2 figs-doublet ἡμέραν…τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 the great and remarkable day The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 lc4g figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a126 figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a127 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 And it will be, everyone Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
|
||
ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on Here, **call on** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a130 figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a132 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a133 figs-quotemarks σωθήσεται 1 will be saved This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 sa78 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 g6vj figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 hear these words Peter is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 a134 translate-names Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον 1 Jesus the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 attested to you by God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 a135 figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 with mighty deeds and wonders and signs The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a136 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 This one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 i6un figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 s38b figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a137 figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 f5kn figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 e38a figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless Here, **hand** refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a138 figs-nominaladj ἀνόμων 1 the lawless Peter is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 f6kd figs-metonymy ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a197 προσπήξαντες 1 having fastened This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
|
||
ACT 2 24 a140 ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
|
||
ACT 2 24 ei37 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 s8j3 figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 having loosed the agonies of death Peter speaks figuratively of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 a141 figs-possession τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 the agonies of death Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 a142 figs-explicit καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 because it was not possible for him to be held by it If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 ykq4 figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 vuf4 figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 dd5a figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a143 writing-pronouns Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a144 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a145 figs-explicit Δαυεὶδ…λέγει εἰς αὐτόν 1 David says about him Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 n2ls figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν μου 1 before me The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 tqak figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a146 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 l6xp figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a147 figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 s4yp figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a148 figs-quotesinquotes διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 zz6k figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope Here, **flesh** figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a150 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a151 figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a152 figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 m3ij figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a153 figs-parallelism οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 whi3 figs-youformal οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου 1 you will not abandon … nor will you allow your The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a155 translate-names οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades **Hades** is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a156 figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 rld3 figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a157 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay Here the word **see** is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 l5cd figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a158 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a159 figs-youformal ἐγνώρισάς…πληρώσεις…σου 1 You made known … you will fill … your The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 xhi3 figs-metaphor ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς 1 You made known to me the paths of life The Messiah speaks figuratively of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 ej5m figs-metaphor πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης 1 you will fill me with gladness The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 y7gf figs-metaphor μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face Here, the word **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a161 figs-quotemarks μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 pv1x figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 ps7c figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 wh97 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 the patriarch David A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 vtc6 figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 he was buried If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 a162 figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 to this day Peter is using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 a163 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 a164 figs-explicit προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς 1 being a prophet and having known Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne Peter is using the word **loins** figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a165 writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke … was he abandoned … his The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a167 figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a168 translate-names ᾍδην 1 Hades See how you translated the term **Hades** in [2:27](../02/27.md). Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a169 figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Here the word **see** is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a170 figs-metonymy οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Peter is using the word **flesh** figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 up5x figs-explicit οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 32 udn1 figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός 1 God has raised up As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 32 kw6a figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a171 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 kij2 figs-activepassive τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς 1 having been exalted to the right of God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 c9mr figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a172 figs-explicit τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a173 figs-possession τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a174 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 c1dr writing-pronouns ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 wsg9 figs-metaphor ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out Peter says figuratively that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 m7fy figs-quotesinquotes λέγει…αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 i8wu figs-explicit εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 The Lord said to my Lord **The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 a175 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 kvn8 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 35 nf1x figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 35 a176 figs-quotemarks τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 for your feet This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 a177 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 xan1 writing-pronouns κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 w1ma κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
|
||
ACT 2 37 l15x figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 zls6 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 a178 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 a179 figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 what should we do The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 a180 figs-you μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε 1 Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 geb2 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah [2:36](../02/36.md). He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So **in the name** here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a183 figs-explicit ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a184 figs-metaphor ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 v8vi figs-explicit πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν 1 to all who are at a distance Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a185 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 the Lord our God By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a186 figs-idiom ἂν προσκαλέσηται 1 may call Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a187 figs-metonymy ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 with many other words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 v6ip figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 he testified and urged them Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a188 figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 Be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 wtd5 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 from this perverse generation The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a189 figs-explicit τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 this perverse generation The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 k1kj writing-endofstory οὖν 1 Therefore Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 r9qz figs-idiom ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 having received his word Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 sv5j figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 souls Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 a192 figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 gi9v figs-synecdoche ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 a194 figs-hyperbole ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 ys3y figs-explicit πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 q6dm figs-doublet πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 many wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 44 u8qk ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 2 44 jy2w figs-hyperbole εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά 1 had all things in common Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 h8tn figs-doublet τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον 1 they were selling their properties and their possessions The words **properties** and **possessions** mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 f74s writing-pronouns καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ 1 they were distributing them Here the pronoun **they** refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun **them** refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 n9hi πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to all, as anyone might have need Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
|
||
ACT 2 46 in43 καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and, continuing unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 2 46 a427 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον 1 breaking bread in each house See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The covenant God made with Abraham<br><br>This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Servant”<br><br>Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.<br><br>### “You killed” (3:15)<br><br>For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>## Important textual issues in this chapter<br><br>### “the Lord our God” (3:22)<br><br>In [3:22](../03/22.md), some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 b5rm grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 br7i figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 to the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
|
||
ACT 3 1 a199 translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 f227 figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 u6nu writing-background καί τις ἀνὴρ 1 And a certain man In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 j68t figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 from the womb of his mother Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a200 figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a201 translate-names Ὡραίαν 1 Beautiful **Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a202 figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 3 a203 figs-explicit ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν 1 asked to receive alms The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 4 xq4u ἀτενίσας…Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν 1 Peter, looking intently at him with John, said This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
|
||
ACT 3 4 e3c6 figs-exclusive βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Look at us Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 x6bm figs-metonymy ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον 1 silver and gold Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 zi9t figs-explicit ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι 1 but what I have, this I give to you What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 t2vf figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 a204 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 a205 figs-imperative περιπάτει 1 walk This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 3 7 ec6j writing-pronouns πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 7 a206 figs-activepassive ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 his feet and ankles were made strong If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 a207 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 abc1 writing-pronouns ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them The pronoun **he** refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 zp7x figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 9 a208 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 zy7h ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ…καθήμενος 1 they recognized him, that he was the one sitting Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
|
||
ACT 3 10 p2zh translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 the Beautiful Gate This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 j6zf figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 a212 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 rk1m translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 the porch that is called Solomon’s This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 rj43 figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 ndi3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 uyg1 figs-rquestion τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ 1 why do you marvel at this? Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 j6ld figs-rquestion ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν? 1 Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness? Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 g4y1 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ 1 at us … our own By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 mwd9 figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 by our own power or godliness Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 q8q2 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ 1 Abraham … Isaac … Jacob These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 a213 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 kmqw figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 a214 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 his Servant Jesus See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
|
||
ACT 3 13 a215 παρεδώκατε 1 delivered up Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
|
||
ACT 3 13 cp1j figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου 1 before the face of Pilate Here the phrase **before the face of** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 a216 translate-names Πειλάτου 1 Pilate **Pilate** is the name of a man. His full name was Pontius Pilate. He was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 yy96 figs-nominaladj κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν 1 when that one had decided to release him Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds **one** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a217 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a218 figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One Peter is using both the adjective **Holy** and the adjective **Righteous** to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds **One** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a219 figs-doublet τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a220 figs-explicit τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 s6qj figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a221 figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 ljn8 figs-explicit τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς 1 the Originator of Life Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a222 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 jwb1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a223 writing-pronouns ἡμεῖς 1 we If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 abc2 figs-infostructure ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 qt8w writing-pronouns τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 a224 figs-metonymy τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name Peter is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 abc3 writing-pronouns ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 the faith that is through him has given to him The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 a225 figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health Peter is speaking of **faith** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 v45t καὶ νῦν 1 And now Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 3 17 a226 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter addresses the people figuratively as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 a227 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 x62k figs-explicit κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε 1 you acted in ignorance Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 a228 figs-ellipsis ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν 1 as also your rulers Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 gcc1 figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως 1 But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 ms6d διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, **the prophets**, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **mouth**. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
|
||
ACT 3 18 z3l7 figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 a229 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 of all the prophets Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 a230 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** figuratively as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking figuratively of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a233 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading or one of two other possible readings, “The Lord your God” or “The Lord God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a250 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 v5nf figs-idiom ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει 1 will raise up for you Here the expression **raise up** does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in [2:24](../02/24.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md). In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 t8di figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 your brothers Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a234 figs-declarative αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a235 figs-idiom αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a236 figs-quotesinquotes ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 t8a5 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a237 figs-declarative πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a238 figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις 1 every soul that Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a239 figs-idiom ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου 1 does not listen to that prophet Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 u6x3 figs-hyperbole πάντες…οἱ προφῆται 1 all the prophets Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 xp9h ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς 1 from Samuel and those after him Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
|
||
ACT 3 24 a240 translate-names Σαμουὴλ 1 Samuel **Samuel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 m9pr figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is using the word **days** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 a241 figs-explicit τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 rh2n figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 You are the sons of the prophets Peter is using the word **sons** figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a242 figs-gendernotations οἱ υἱοὶ 1 the sons Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a243 figs-metonymy καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 and of the covenant that God made with your fathers The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a244 figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a245 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 wid4 figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 mad5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed The term **seed** figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a246 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a247 figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 will all the families of the earth be blessed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 all the families of the earth Here, **families** refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 God, having raised up his Servant, sent him The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
|
||
ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Unity<br><br>The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.<br><br>### “Signs and wonders”<br><br>This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)<br><br>The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “no other name” (4:12)<br><br>“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
|
||
ACT 4 1 abc4 writing-pronouns λαλούντων…αὐτῶν 1 as they were speaking The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 ew3l figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 the captain of the temple The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 a253 translate-names οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees **Sadducees** is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 m74s figs-explicit οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 d3tv figs-synecdoche οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 abc5 writing-pronouns διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς 1 greatly troubled because they were teaching The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 mg5l figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 np5g figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a254 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a255 writing-pronouns ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 zla7 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a256 figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 put them in custody If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 h5f9 figs-explicit ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη 1 since it was already evening The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 a257 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 a258 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 bm1f figs-gendernotations ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν 1 the number of the men Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 qd8g figs-explicit ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 became about 5,000 The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 lw2d writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 cdj1 figs-explicit συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 j6p8 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 i9tj figs-activepassive συναχθῆναι 1 were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 a259 figs-explicit Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας 1 Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 l44n translate-names Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης…Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 a260 ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ 1 as many as were from the high priestly family Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
|
||
ACT 4 7 abc6 writing-pronouns στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο 1 having set them in their midst, they asked them The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 t1eq figs-doublet ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? 1 By what power or in what name have you done this? The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 jc21 figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 in what name Here, **name** refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 a261 figs-youdual ὑμεῖς 1 you Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 su5x figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a262 figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a263 figs-merism ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι 1 Rulers of the people and elders Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a264 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 of the people Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 pq85 figs-irony εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται 1 if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 je6d figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα 1 we are being questioned If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 b92n figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 he was made well If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 snd5 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “then we want you and all the people of Israel to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 j3px writing-pronouns πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 1 to you all The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 khn7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 1 in the name Here, **name** refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a265 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene See how you translated this in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a266 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε 1 whom you crucified It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 jyj6 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 whom God raised from the dead As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a267 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 nwg6 writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 He The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 f1nx figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 a268 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 jm25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 a269 figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 among men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 tdw8 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 we Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 qaa5 figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 realizing The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 xn39 writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 erv7 figs-doublet ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται 1 they were uneducated and ordinary men The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 h3cy figs-activepassive τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον 1 the man who had been healed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 a270 writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον 1 standing with them, they had nothing The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 fq4w figs-explicit οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν 1 they had nothing to say in opposition The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 15 ql31 writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 15 a271 translate-names τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 15 a272 figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 p4g6 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 What should we do to these men? This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 jn12 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 everyone who lives in Jerusalem This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 a notable sign Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
|
||
ACT 4 17 a273 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 f71l figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a274 ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 unto more Alternate translation: “any further”
|
||
ACT 4 17 w52j figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 to speak in this name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a275 figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 no longer to speak in this name to any of men In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a276 figs-gendernotations μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 to any of men Here, **men** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a277 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 So Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a278 writing-pronouns καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning them, they commanded them The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a279 figs-doublet μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν 1 neither to speak nor to teach The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a280 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a281 figs-hendiadys ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a282 figs-explicit ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 jf1d figs-metonymy εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Whether it is right before God Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a283 figs-idiom ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to listen to you rather than to God Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 a284 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 hf3u figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν 1 we … we have seen and heard Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 a285 figs-doublenegatives οὐ δυνάμεθα…ἡμεῖς…μὴ λαλεῖν 1 we are not able not to speak You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 y5y1 writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 having warned them further, they released them The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 z2bx figs-explicit διὰ τὸν λαόν 1 on account of the people The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 jbl6 figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν 1 they were all glorifying God Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 gy8d writing-background ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 a286 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 ju4w figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 the man to whom this sign of healing had happened Luke is speaking figuratively as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 a287 figs-possession τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 this sign of healing Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a288 figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 having been released If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a289 figs-go ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους 1 they came to their own people In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 j2cx figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους 1 their own people The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a290 figs-merism οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the chief priests and the elders As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 j3ap writing-pronouns οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἦραν 1 having heard, they raised The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a291 ἦραν φωνὴν 1 they raised their voice Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
|
||
ACT 4 24 zu28 figs-idiom ἦραν φωνὴν 1 they raised their voice The expression **they raised their voice** is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a292 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 4 24 a293 figs-youformal σὺ 1 you The word **you** is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in [4:25–30](../04/25.md). You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a160 figs-merism ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a294 τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heaven The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
|
||
ACT 4 25 ka83 figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant The word **mouth** refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 vc5z figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’ As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a295 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 kat6 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 father Here, **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a296 παιδός 1 servant The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md).
|
||
ACT 4 25 a297 figs-ellipsis ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a298 figs-parallelism ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 f1x6 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things? In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 h6rc translate-names ἔθνη 1 the Gentiles The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 w622 figs-explicit κενά 1 useless things The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 fb5a figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 w2by figs-parallelism παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 w64b figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The kings of the earth took their stand This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 a299 figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 the rulers were gathered If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 a300 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
|
||
ACT 4 26 yv19 figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord … his Christ Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 a301 translate-names Ἡρῴδης 1 Herod **Herod** is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 a302 translate-names Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος 1 Pontius Pilate This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name **Pilate** in [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 b1g9 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 nuc1 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 in this city The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 ca33 παῖδά 1 Servant Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah”
|
||
ACT 4 27 a303 figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 whom you anointed In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 yz7m figs-metonymy ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen Here, **hand** figuratively means God’s power and **counsel** figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 a304 figs-hendiadys ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The words **hand** and **counsel**, joined by **and**, are expressing a single idea. The word **hand**, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his **counsel**, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 a305 figs-personification ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 b38z καὶ τὰ νῦν 1 And now The believers use the expression **And now** to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 4 29 t5qm figs-idiom ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν 1 look upon their threats The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 a306 figs-123person τοῖς δούλοις σου 1 to your servants The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 zh7j figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 your word The believers are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 a307 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 with all boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 x9r1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen Here the **hand** figuratively represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 a308 figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 txb5 τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of your holy Servant Jesus Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
|
||
ACT 4 31 a309 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a310 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 in which they were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a314 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 xu3j figs-metonymy ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a315 figs-doublet ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul The terms **heart** and **soul** mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a316 τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ 1 of the things that were to him Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
|
||
ACT 4 32 zyp5 figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 everything was common to them The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 a317 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 a318 writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 d8dr figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a331 translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 For there was not anyone needy among them This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a319 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a320 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 for Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 gw3v figs-hyperbole ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον 1 all who were owners of lands or houses The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 l938 figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων 1 the price of the things being sold If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 a321 translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they got on the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
|
||
ACT 4 35 vv4z translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 a322 figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 it was being distributed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to each one, according as anyone had need If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 uc2a writing-participants Ἰωσὴφ δὲ 1 Then Joseph Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a323 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς 1 Joseph … Barnabas **Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a326 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a328 translate-names Λευείτης 1 a Levite The name **Levite** describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a329 translate-names Κύπριος 1 Cyprus **Cyprus** is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 37 a330 ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ 1 that was to him See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned”
|
||
ACT 4 37 gtv5 translate-symaction ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 laid it at the feet of the apostles See how you translated the similar expression in [4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 5 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)<br><br>No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
|
||
ACT 5 1 v27a writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 ysl9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 a332 writing-participants σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ 1 with Sapphira his wife Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 a333 translate-names Σαπφείρῃ 1 Sapphria **Sapphira** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 2 a334 figs-explicit ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 he kept back from the price The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, and you could say why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 2 xm1t συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι…ἔθηκεν 1 his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
|
||
ACT 5 2 dy8b figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν 1 he laid it at the feet of the apostles This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 grr9 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου? 1 why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 pqd4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 why has Satan filled your heart Peter is speaking figuratively of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a335 figs-metaphor τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 your heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a426 figs-events ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 zz5u figs-metonymy ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a336 figs-explicit καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 and to keep back from the price of the land The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretendng that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 vu7g figs-rquestion οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν? 1 While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it not in your authority? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 vi8w ἔμενεν 1 While it remained Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
|
||
ACT 5 4 k7nc figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 being sold If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a337 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a338 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 i5dw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a339 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a340 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter speaks figuratively of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a341 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 You have not lied to men, but to God Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a342 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 to men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a343 figs-metonymy ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 And hearing these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 cc5y figs-euphemism πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a344 figs-events πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a345 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 great fear came upon all who heard Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a346 figs-idiom ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 rising up, the young men wrapped him up Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a347 figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 the young men This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a348 translate-unknown συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 wrapped him up It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 a349 figs-idiom ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ 1 And an interval of about three hours happened, and This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 ry54 writing-pronouns ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ 1 his wife The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 k3c9 figs-explicit τὸ γεγονὸς 1 what had happened If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 8 a350 ἀπεκρίθη…πρὸς αὐτὴν 1 said to her The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
|
||
ACT 5 8 a351 figs-youdual ἀπέδοσθε 1 you sold Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 5 8 bcf6 figs-explicit τοσούτου…ναί, τοσούτου 1 for so much … yes, for so much This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 v7sw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου? 1 How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 hc22 figs-activepassive συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν 1 it was agreed together by you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 w1lb figs-you ὑμῖν…σου…σε 1 by you … your … you The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 pg1e πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
|
||
ACT 5 9 a352 figs-metonymy πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a353 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες 1 Behold, the feet Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 xj1l figs-metonymy οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a354 figs-explicit οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a355 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε 1 and they will carry you out The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 s7en figs-euphemism ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 she fell down at his feet and expired The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 a356 figs-events ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 she fell down at his feet and expired Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 nwb9 figs-metonymy ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 she fell down at his feet This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 a357 figs-explicit οἱ νεανίσκοι 1 the young men See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 11 vym8 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 5 11 a358 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα 1 great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 c2e7 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 sri8 figs-metonymy διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ 1 many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 ux3n figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 aud2 writing-pronouns ἦσαν…πάντες 1 they were all The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 a359 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 5 12 k99k translate-names τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος 1 the Porch of Solomon This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 13 a360 figs-explicit τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 none of the others The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 13 a361 figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 dared to join them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a364 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 so that Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 l9bs writing-pronouns ἐκφέρειν 1 they … carried The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a365 figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a366 figs-doublet κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων 1 cots and mats The words **cots** and **mats** mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 y2ev figs-explicit ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow any one of them The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a367 ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
|
||
ACT 5 16 a368 figs-nominaladj ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick See how you translated the expression **the sick** in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 fu1a figs-activepassive ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων 1 those afflicted by unclean spirits If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 lyc7 figs-activepassive οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 a369 figs-hyperbole οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 x2ed grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 f9ye figs-events ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a370 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a371 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a373 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 18 j58p figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 18 a374 figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 19 wd37 writing-pronouns ἐξαγαγών…αὐτοὺς 1 bringing them out The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 qm16 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 z1x3 figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 all the words of this life The angel is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 a375 τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 of this life Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
|
||
ACT 5 21 a376 figs-idiom ἀκούσαντες 1 having heard this Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 df1u figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 l7uf figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον 1 about daybreak The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a377 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δὲ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a378 figs-explicit παραγενόμενος 1 having arrived This does not mean that the high priest and his allies **arrived** in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a379 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 li6a figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 sent to the prison Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 baw2 writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 concerning them The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 a384 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Behold, the men This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 a8dz figs-you ἔθεσθε 1 you put Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 c1am figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 standing in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 26 e24h writing-pronouns τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν 1 Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them The first instance of **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 27 iq7w writing-pronouns ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς 1 And having brought them The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a385 παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν 1 We commanded you with a command For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
|
||
ACT 5 28 f7pz figs-you ὑμῖν…πεπληρώκατε…ὑμῶν…βούλεσθε 1 you … you have filled … your … you desire In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 g2hi figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name Here, **name** figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a386 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε 1 behold, you have filled The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 j4kr figs-metaphor πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν 1 you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching The high priest is speaking figuratively of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a387 figs-metaphor βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 you desire to bring upon us The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a388 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 ym1k figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα 1 the blood The high priest is using the term **blood** figuratively to mean death, by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a389 figs-explicit τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου 1 this man The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 a390 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 answering, Peter and the apostles said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 di9u figs-explicit Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 Peter and the apostles said Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 a391 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a392 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 kwsc figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 r7av figs-idiom ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν 1 raised up Jesus As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a393 figs-you ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed The word **you** is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a394 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 pu5j figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree The word translated as **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a395 figs-explicit κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree In some languages the word **hung** would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 a396 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 this one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 a397 figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 uh2d translate-symaction τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 mr1d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 q1il figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 a398 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 a399 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 yml6 figs-explicit ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 whom God has given to those obeying him Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 33 abx6 writing-pronouns οἱ…ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς 1 having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 i2rr writing-participants τις…Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ 1 a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a400 translate-names Φαρισαῖος 1 Pharisee The name **Pharisee** describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a401 translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 Gamaliel **Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a402 writing-background νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 a law teacher, honored by all the people Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 fpr4 figs-activepassive τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a403 figs-hyperbole τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a404 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 xk6g figs-explicit ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω…τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι 1 commanded to put the apostles outside Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a405 figs-nominaladj βραχὺ 1 for a little Luke is using the adjective **little** as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 a406 grammar-connect-time-sequential τε 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 a407 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 ae1u figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν 1 pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before these days Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a409 translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 Theudas **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 and they came to nothing Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
|
||
ACT 5 37 f33y figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 After this one Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a413 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 in the days of the census Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 kz4s figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 drew away people after him Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a414 figs-nominaladj κἀκεῖνος 1 That one also Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a415 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a416 figs-activepassive διεσκορπίσθησαν 1 were scattered If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 i4bw καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν 1 And now I say these things to you Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 5 38 a417 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Gamaliel is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 wz89 ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 keep away from these men and release them When Gamaliel tells the council to **keep away from these men**, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
|
||
ACT 5 38 zh1d ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο 1 if this counsel or this work is from men Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
|
||
ACT 5 38 a418 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 uql8 figs-activepassive καταλυθήσεται 1 it will be destroyed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a419 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 but Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 j819 writing-pronouns εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 if it is from God Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a420 figs-explicit μήποτε 1 lest It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 you may even be found If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 z31c grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 fca9 figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 to speak in the name of Jesus Here, **name** figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 a423 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 from the face of the Sanhedrin Luke is using the word **face** figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 cv8y figs-activepassive κατηξιώθησαν 1 they had been considered worthy If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name Here, **the Name** figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 jj94 writing-endofstory τε 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 kyp6 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 x424 figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Acts [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The distribution to the widows<br><br>The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “His face was like the face of an angel”<br><br>No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
|
||
ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Now in those days Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 ftz8 translate-names τοὺς Ἑβραίους 1 the Hebrews In this context, Luke is using the name **Hebrews** to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 in the daily service If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 kwvo grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 So Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 n5r4 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 is74 translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 jm17 figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to leave behind the word of God The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 w9re figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tables To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 lcyx figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 i27a figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 over this task When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 4 b3bj figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 of the word The apostles are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 wh9t figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 jayc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 ajq1 translate-names Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον 1 Stephen…Philip…Prochorus…Nicanor…Timon…Parmenas…Nicolaus These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 vsyk figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 yqsj figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 cg5s translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 an Antiochian The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 6 lvaj figs-events προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 6 6 wu1y translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 and placed their hands upon them The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 x48w writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 wu4l figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 ueie figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 jg8y figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 qq3l figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 et2j writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Now Stephen Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 pzr0 figs-metaphor Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 h8sg figs-hendiadys Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 m0zh figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 great wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against The expression **stand against** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 s2cl figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 We have heard The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 dgxi translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They…stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 12 dkbj translate-names Συνέδριον 1 Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 14 c5l9 translate-names ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 14 uok4 figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 this place By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 15 k8rw figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 saw his face as the face of an angel Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||
ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in [6:13–14](../06/13.md). Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin.<br>- (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him<br>- (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses<br>- (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law<br>- (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave<br>- (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built<br>- (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build<br>- (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members<br>- (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.<br><br>A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.<br><br>It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Stephen said”<br><br>Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.<br><br>### “Full of the Holy Spirit”<br><br>The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.<br><br>### Foreshadowing<br><br>When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in [7:58](../07/58.md), even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Implied information<br><br>Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Metonymy<br><br>Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Important textual issues in this chapter<br><br>### “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)<br><br>In [7:46](../07/46.md), some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Background knowledge<br><br>The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.<br><br>### Reference of “our” and “you”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
|
||
ACT 7 1 hy9r figs-explicit ὁ ἀρχιερεύς 1 Connecting Statement: Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the high priest** was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 abc7 writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 Then he said The pronoun **he** refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 zbq0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 **Men, brothers and fathers** is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 v5si figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers, listen to me Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** figuratively to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 kfep figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 n09p figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in [6:11](../06/11.md) that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the **God of glory** acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 pt4h figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 w1ya figs-metaphor τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ 1 Stephen is using the term **father** figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 ust7 translate-names Μεσοποταμίᾳ…Χαρράν 1 **Mesopotamia** is the name of a region, and **Harran** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 3 uksj figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 3 kgef writing-pronouns εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 4 pfg3 writing-pronouns κατῴκησεν…αὐτοῦ…μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 4 mv26 translate-names γῆς Χαλδαίων 1 **Chaldeans** is the name of a people group. This group lived in Mesopotamia, so as [7:2](../07/02.md) indicates, Abraham had been living among these people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 4 pfg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listenting to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 tnsm writing-pronouns οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐπηγγείλατο…αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ…αὐτόν…οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ 1 The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 he did not give him an inheritance in it Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
|
||
ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-explicit οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 u6iw figs-metaphor αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him The term **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 j09v figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 6 tn6b figs-explicit ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 6 jymv writing-pronouns ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν 1 Stephen is using the singular word **seed** figuratively to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 k8pz figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 f7fw figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος 1 I will judge the nation Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 q7y6 writing-pronouns ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** figuratively to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 iwfx writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐγέννησεν 1 The first instance of **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 oel3 translate-names τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ 1 **Isaac** and **Jacob** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 g67f translate-names τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 ams1 figs-ellipsis καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Jacob of the 12 patriarchs Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 gaww figs-explicit τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word **patriarchs** to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 n981 translate-kinship οἱ πατριάρχαι 1 the patriarchs Here the word **patriarchs** refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 fq7w translate-names τὸν Ἰωσὴφ 1 **Joseph** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 tik7 figs-explicit ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 sold him into Egypt Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 u3dp translate-names Αἴγυπτον 1 **Egypt** is the name of a place. See how you translated it in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 w1is figs-idiom ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 was with him When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 kxgk writing-pronouns ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 In these phrases the word **he** refers to God and the words **him** and **his** refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 bfoo figs-abstractnouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **favor** and **wisdom** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 vpir figs-idiom ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 Here the phrase **before Pharaoh** may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 s5vk figs-metonymy ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 The phrase **before Pharaoh** could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion, by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 nycs writing-pronouns κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over all his household The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 p42j figs-personification ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 came a famine Here, Stephen speaks figuratively of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 ncnr translate-names Χανάαν 1 **Canaan** is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 frd4 figs-abstractnouns καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 pia8 figs-explicit ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 grain Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 cvhm figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον 1 By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 mbg8 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 a5f3 figs-nominaladj ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **second** as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds **time** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 m37e figs-activepassive ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 was made known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 jxk8 figs-activepassive φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ 1 the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh The phrase **became known** is not actually a passive from in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 14 aam5 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀποστείλας…Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ 1 sending them back Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||
ACT 7 14 wl32 figs-idiom ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε 1 Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 zasp figs-idiom κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 w2sm figs-explicit ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers died Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 fe56 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 slg3 figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 they were carried over … and laid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 pnur translate-names Συχὲμ 1 **Shechem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 la8a translate-bmoney τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver In biblical times, people used **silver** as money. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 pk1p translate-names τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ 1 **Hamor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 tuq2 figs-events καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 kh8g figs-personification καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 tlh9 figs-explicit καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 the time of the promise … approached Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 s2oe figs-hendiadys ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 whe7 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 there arose over Egypt another king When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 g2wq figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 e2y6 figs-metonymy ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ 1 who did not know Joseph Stephen is not saying that this king **did not know Joseph** personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 qwbi writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 z312 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 ug6c figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 rh3k figs-explicit τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 n2vl figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 nib6 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ 1 Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 q66s writing-participants ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 At that time Moses was born Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 cz9w figs-activepassive ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 cd5z figs-idiom ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ 1 he was beautiful to God This could mean: (1) that Moses was **beautiful** in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very **beautiful**. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 pnb1 figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνετράφη…ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός 1 was nourished If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you can make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 21 w3iu figs-activepassive ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 But when he was exposed Moses **was exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 21 el3b figs-metaphor ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus [2:1-10](../exo/02/01.md).) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 c9nw figs-activepassive ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 Moses was educated If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 att9 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 in all the wisdom of the Egyptians Stephen says **all** as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 m3dm δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ 1 mighty in his words and works Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
|
||
ACT 7 23 o4cg figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 b9gd figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **it came up on his heart** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 x493 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 i4ko figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον 1 And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the Egyptian** who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 y3yh figs-activepassive ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 r2e8 figs-explicit πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 hrsh figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 mug9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Stephen is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 f6sn figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 nhb9 figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 by his hand was giving salvation to them Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 t2vc figs-explicit αὐτοῖς 1 to them as they were quarreling It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 qyc2 figs-youdual αὐτοῖς…αὐτοὺς…ἐστε…ἀδικεῖτε 1 Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 mpc7 figs-abstractnouns συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην 1 he urged them to peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 kyde figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 zzt4 figs-idiom ἄνδρες 1 Men, you are brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 z5g2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Moses is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 k1ku figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Why is it that you are hurting each other? Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 xef7 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The word **him** refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 iq30 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 q2r4 figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us? The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 wtq4 figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν 1 In this context, the words **ruler** and **judge** mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 t1hw figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The man is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 vow8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **do you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 hk1g figs-rquestion μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you? The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 qfxh figs-quotesinquotes μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 jxka ὃν τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
|
||
ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit ἔφυγεν…Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 General Information: The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 29 rbhm figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 29 pit4 translate-names Μαδιάμ 1 **Midian** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο 1 at this statement Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 qci0 figs-activepassive πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 veft figs-idiom ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 31 q6w6 figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 he marveled at the sight Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 31 uk7u figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου 1 and as he approached to look at it Stephen is speaking figuratively of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 32 b26o figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 bpml figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 x7cd translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 Untie the sandals In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 rxnj figs-explicit λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 xl9p τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **sandals**. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
|
||
ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 for the place on which you are standing is holy ground The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made **holy** by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 l0au figs-quotesinquotes ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 yz7b figs-idiom ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb **seen** is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 x5bg figs-possession τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 of my people God uses the possessive word **my** to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 j32c figs-metaphor κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means figuratively that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 atdo grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 sq8y figs-imperative νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 x34c figs-declarative ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 x4p2 figs-litany τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 General Information: Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 nv5g figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 vuqy figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 See how you translated this rhetorical question in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 oic6 figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν 1 See how you translated the combination of **ruler** and **judge** in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 vp7e λυτρωτὴν 1 a redeemer In this context, the word translated **redeemer** refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
|
||
ACT 7 35 yjz9 figs-metonymy σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου 1 with the hand of the angel who appeared to him in the bush Here, **hand** is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 abc9 figs-idiom ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ 1 appeared to him See how you translated the word **appeared** in [7:30](../07/30.md). Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 36 gz9r figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 during 40 years The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 36 n75x translate-names Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ 1 Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 k710 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 vykp figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 b4sg figs-idiom προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει…ὡς ἐμέ 1 will raise up a prophet Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 j2rx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 from among your brothers Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 fd25 writing-pronouns οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 1 This is the one **This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 z1z7 figs-infostructure μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 vdnz writing-pronouns τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο 1 This second instance of **who** in the verse refers to Moses, not to the **fathers**. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 y2zu figs-explicit ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 who received living words to give to us It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the **words** that he **received.** Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 p3xk figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 living words Stephen is using the term **words** to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 w2gs figs-metaphor λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **living** figuratively to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 ab0s writing-pronouns ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The word **whom** refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 mvz8 figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 they pushed him away Stephen is speaking figuratively to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 z3ze figs-metonymy ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 turned back in their hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 40 l8u7 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 40 kb3o εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
|
||
ACT 7 40 fzsq translate-names τῷ Ἀαρών 1 **Aaron** is the name of a man, the older brother of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 40 a68q figs-infostructure ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ 1 It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 ux1j figs-explicit ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 they made an image of a calf Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this **image of a calf** was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as **the idol** later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 v6tx figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Stephen is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 hjp0 writing-pronouns ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 hh77 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands**, by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 d3dd figs-metaphor ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away Stephen is speaking figuratively as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 u7lx figs-metaphor τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking figuratively of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 ya6v figs-activepassive γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 f314 figs-explicit βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the book of the prophets This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 w38i figs-quotemarks μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 o5ly figs-doublenegatives μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel? Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
|
||
ACT 7 42 q9rr figs-yousingular μὴ…προσηνέγκατέ 1 **You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 tck0 figs-merism σφάγια καὶ θυσίας 1 In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 h20h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../01/32.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 q85n figs-irony ἀνελάβετε…μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 gxh2 figs-yousingular ἀνελάβετε…ὑμῶν…ἐποιήσατε…ὑμᾶς 1 As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 im7e figs-explicit τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 cq47 figs-explicit τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 gm4g figs-explicit τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 zgq6 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 I will carry you away beyond Babylon Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated **and** to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
|
||
ACT 7 43 rrn8 figs-quotemarks μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 hfmx figs-ellipsis ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen is not saying that the **tabernacle** was **with** the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built **according to the pattern** that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 m9gw figs-metonymy ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony Stephen calls this tent the **tabernacle of the testimony** by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 fk06 figs-infostructure καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 masq figs-explicit διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 avqh figs-explicit τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 uqca writing-pronouns ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors and they brought it in”
|
||
ACT 7 45 qjov διαδεξάμενοι 1 The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
|
||
ACT 7 45 n2sc εἰσήγαγον…μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
|
||
ACT 7 45 e3gu figs-explicit εἰσήγαγον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 znov translate-names Ἰησοῦ 1 **Joshua** is the name of a man, the successor of Moses as leader of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 eww5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Stephen is using the word **face** figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 zjlj figs-ellipsis ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 wot8 figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 bux7 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 **David** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 x4kl writing-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”
|
||
ACT 7 46 ykio figs-metonymy ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 yl80 figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 w3cu figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word figuratively to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 in7m translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use the reading **the house of Jacob** or another possible reading, “the God of Jacob.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 fsmp figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 47 bo1q translate-names Σολομῶν 1 **Solomon** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [3:11](../03/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 47 k54c figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word **house** figuratively to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 47 dlk8 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 wuce ὁ Ὕψιστος 1 This is a respectful title for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning.
|
||
ACT 7 48 fwvu figs-nominaladj χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, figuratively to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 ota0 figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** figuratively means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 d4fh figs-explicit καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 oyax figs-quotemarks ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 k2vn figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet Speaking through Isaiah, God figuratively describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 i4u3 figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 rqr4 figs-parallelism ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 mshp figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** figuratively means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 vjaq figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 hqjr figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express its meaning as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”
|
||
ACT 7 51 umq6 figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 yxe3 figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking figuratively of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears Stephen speaks figuratively of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 zgon figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 w164 figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 d2v8 figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 q8wb figs-nominaladj τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
|
||
ACT 7 53 axhl writing-pronouns οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them figuratively to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 53 euw5 figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law as ordained by angels Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 ef2g figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Now hearing these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 dlux figs-explicit πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 ntp4 figs-explicit ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν 1 and looking intently into heaven The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 zpry figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 vamz figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 gzvv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listener’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 p0jg figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 aqp8 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 imoa figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 cr19 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 rvwp translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 wtwk figs-idiom κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that suggests figuratively that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 hm0q κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
|
||
ACT 7 57 t287 ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
|
||
ACT 7 58 ks1u figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Luke is likely speaking figuratively when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 teas figs-explicit οἱ μάρτυρες 1 These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 ryrh figs-explicit ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου 1 The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 wy7n translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 sx2p figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet The expression **at the feet** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 e2vl translate-names Σαύλου 1 of a young man **Saul** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 59 fxhz figs-hendiadys ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 7 59 k2el figs-imperative δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 u86q translate-symaction θεὶς…τὰ γόνατα 1 But having knelt down on his knees Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 hi24 figs-idiom ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 dfjs figs-imperative μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.<br><br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.<br><br>The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Receiving the Holy Spirit<br><br>In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.<br><br>### Proclaimed<br><br>This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
|
||
ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 i1tc writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 vc8x figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 xp25 figs-activepassive πάντες…διεσπάρησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 u5pi figs-hyperbole πάντες…διεσπάρησαν 1 they were all scattered The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 ok0h translate-names τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας 1 **Judea** and **Samaria** are the names of regions. See how you translated them in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 k5a2 figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 except the apostles The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 2 tp9e translate-versebridge συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 8 2 sjc8 figs-explicit συνεκόμισαν…τὸν Στέφανον 1 devout men The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 according to the houses Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
|
||
ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους…τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met…believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 n52l figs-nominaladj οἱ…διασπαρέντες 1 Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 ymy5 figs-activepassive οἱ…διασπαρέντες 1 had been scattered If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 dh3x translate-names Φίλιππος 1 Connecting Statement: **Philip** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:13](../01/13.md). Philip was one of the apostles. A man by that same name, possibly the same man, was chosen as one of the deacons in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 gz5m figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 went down to the city of Samaria Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 f45b figs-idiom τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ Luke is using the name **Christ** figuratively by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 cnt9 figs-explicit οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds Luke implicitly means **the crowds** in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 jyvw ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 Alternate translation: “all together”
|
||
ACT 8 6 tt0i figs-nominaladj τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 Luke is using the participle **being spoken**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 g0ft figs-activepassive τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 wm83 τὰ σημεῖα 1 were paying attention to Here the word **signs** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
|
||
ACT 8 7 un6b figs-infostructure πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο 1 As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had **unclean spirits** being the subject of the sentence to the **unclean spirits** themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 pehe figs-nominaladj τῶν ἐχόντων 1 Luke is using the participle **having**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **those** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 xb2n ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα 1 having unclean spirits Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
|
||
ACT 8 7 nz7y figs-idiom βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 v8uj figs-activepassive πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 imbh figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι 1 Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 anq3 figs-activepassive πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 s8bm grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 r0nz figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων 1 Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ…τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md).
|
||
ACT 8 10 mvcm writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 h51l figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking figuratively, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 h5ya writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 j3d8 translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 yw5v figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 the power of God which is called Great If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 h1hg writing-pronouns ἐπίστευσαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 zwoj figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 zjh5 figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 jg1w figs-infostructure εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Since Jesus inaugurated the **kingdom of God** when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 vsy8 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 k2th figs-rpronouns ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν 1 Simon himself also believed Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 bayg ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ 1 Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
|
||
ACT 8 13 v91t figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς 1 having been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 rnr3 figs-irony θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας 1 The word that ULT translates as **works** here is the same word that it translates as “power” in [8:10](../08/10.md). It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that **works** of power that are truly **great** are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 d4yb figs-doublet τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις 1 The terms **signs** and **works** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 s7lr writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 lk9b figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 uwxo figs-exclamations ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-metonymy ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria Luke is using the word **Samaria** figuratively by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 e682 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 td5t translate-names Πέτρον καὶ Ἰωάννην 1 **Peter** and **John** are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 af1n writing-pronouns οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν 1 who, having come down The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 hd1w figs-youdual οἵτινες 1 Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 hk1m figs-idiom καταβάντες 1 having come down Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 bun9 figs-go καταβάντες 1 prayed for them Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 d2z9 figs-metaphor οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 l4ez grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 qmjp figs-doublenegatives οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 bpzz writing-pronouns οὐδέπω…ἦν…ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 rn3c figs-metonymy μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 m1nw figs-activepassive μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον 1 they had only been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 bsll writing-pronouns ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον 1 The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 bldf figs-youdual ἐπετίθεσαν 1 Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])d John placed their **hands** on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 8 18 rh79 figs-activepassive δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 19 fbw9 δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
|
||
ACT 8 20 df1j figs-exclamations τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 8 20 y4ny figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring figuratively to money, by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 20 gh12 figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Peter is referring figuratively to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 p2ev figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 There is to you no part or share in this matter The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 ufk3 figs-doublet σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 xbh2 figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 because your heart is not right Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 p9v4 figs-metonymy ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 sa6s figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης 1 this wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 ppk5 figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 the intention of your heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 pe2u grammar-connect-condition-fact δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 lq4i figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 tf3s translate-unknown εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 kpu6 figs-metonymy εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is using the **gall** plant figuratively by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 d3v7 figs-metaphor εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 in the poison of bitterness Peter is describing **bitterness** figuratively as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 j696 figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 the bond of unrighteousness Peter speaks figuratively of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 n5cw figs-youdual ὑμεῖς…εἰρήκατε 1 Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 v2wy figs-imperative δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 hwc6 writing-pronouns δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 u1a4 ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
|
||
ACT 8 24 sk5w figs-explicit μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 nothing … of which you have spoken Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 nzvg grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 p3rj figs-explicit οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 uz15 figs-nominaladj οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες 1 when they had testified Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 ww9k figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 spoken the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 eu66 figs-metonymy πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 to many villages of the Samaritans The term **villages** refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 mbj9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **But** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 w1nk figs-idiom ἀνάστηθι 1 Arise and go Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 le2c figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 a18y writing-background αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος 1 This is desert This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 s0yn figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη 1 As in the previous verse, the word **arising** means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 xy7x writing-participants ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the word **behold** to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 zkc5 writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 i5zh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ 1 This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 s1uf translate-unknown εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης 1 a eunuch While the word **eunuch** describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 t5t1 translate-names Κανδάκης 1 of Candace **Kandake** was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 nm48 figs-metaphor ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς 1 Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was **over** the **treasure** of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 v8q7 figs-explicit ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 who had come to Jerusalem to worship The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 uk32 figs-go ὃς ἐληλύθει 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 d3kv translate-unknown τοῦ ἅρματος 1 chariot Here and in [8:29](../08/29.md) and [8:38](../08/38.md), the term **chariot** probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 n40c figs-explicit ἀνεγίνωσκεν 1 Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as [8:30](../08/30.md) explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot The Spirit means figuratively that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 30 x98i figs-explicit ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις 1 Do you understand what you are reading? The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 31 r5g2 figs-rquestion πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 how would I be able, unless someone will guide me? The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 31 zx9h figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 nd93 figs-explicit ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 This a quotation from Isaiah [53:7–8](../isa/53/07.md). It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 bgk9 figs-abstractnouns ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 kh97 figs-activepassive ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 lu3j translate-unknown ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος 1 like a lamb before its shearer is silent A **shearer** is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 k8sy figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 This means that the Messiah does not speak, by association with the way a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 dwur figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **humiliation** and **justice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 y2a1 figs-activepassive ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 In humiliation his justice was taken away If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 k3uz figs-rquestion τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Who can fully describe his generation? Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 ec09 figs-declarative τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 yxxn figs-abstractnouns τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generation**, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 idk8 figs-activepassive αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ 1 his life was taken from the earth If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 agq5 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 htb2 figs-idiom δέομαί σου 1 I am begging you The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 pa3m writing-pronouns ἑτέρου τινός 1 In this context, the pronoun **other** means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 j7xw figs-metonymy ἀνοίξας…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 This means that Philip spoke, by association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 uw21 figs-explicit τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης 1 this scripture By **this scripture**, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 xg4i figs-metonymy εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Luke is using the name **Jesus** figuratively by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 ip13 figs-metonymy τι ὕδωρ…ὕδωρ 1 they were going along the road Luke and the official are using the word **water** figuratively to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 muz2 figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 What is preventing me from being baptized? This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in [8:37](../08/37.md) by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 wb9j figs-activepassive με βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 ov75 translate-textvariants εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 qj5i figs-metaphor ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 djq2 figs-activepassive σωθήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 e3uu figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to the what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 8 38 l8wl figs-metonymy ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 he commanded the chariot to stop Luke is using the term **chariot** figuratively by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 38 nn00 writing-pronouns ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** stands for Philip, and the pronoun **him** stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 39 xp52 grammar-connect-time-sequential γὰρ 1 the eunuch did not see him anymore While the word translated **for** often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip any more because he did not look for him but instead **went on his way**. Rather, the word **for** seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 r1x7 figs-explicit Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 bbws figs-activepassive Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 passed through Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
|
||
ACT 8 40 zfn6 figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 yf7i grammar-connect-time-background Ἄζωτον…Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.<br><br>In [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.<br><br>Acts [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”<br><br>The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.<br><br>### “the church”<br><br>Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### What Saul saw when he met Jesus<br><br>It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
|
||
ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-hendiadys ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 9 1 lrre figs-metonymy ἐμπνέων 1 Luke is using the term **breathing** figuratively by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 wyfp writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…εὕρῃ…ἀγάγῃ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 zu6j translate-unknown ἐπιστολὰς 1 See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these **letters** were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** figuratively by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 lvzt translate-names Δαμασκὸν 1 **Damascus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 thuy translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 mma1 figs-activepassive δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 jf4g figs-explicit ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 dm6c αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 there shone on him a light from heaven Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
|
||
ACT 9 3 gua8 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
|
||
ACT 9 4 y4u4 figs-explicit πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 he fell to the ground Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 4 c9l4 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me.” or “stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 9 5 jaq2 τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Who are you, Lord? Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is **Lord**. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir”
|
||
ACT 9 5 abc0 writing-pronouns εἶπεν…ὁ 1 he The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 5 q8ge εἶ…σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
|
||
ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-explicit ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 8 dgg8 writing-pronouns εἰσήγαγον 1 he was seeing nothing The pronoun **they** stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
|
||
ACT 9 9 t8uc figs-explicit οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 neither ate nor drank This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. [9:11](../09/11.md) says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 j847 writing-participants ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας 1 Now there was Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in [5:1](../05/01.md) (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 vqh0 ὁ Κύριος 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **the Lord** is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
|
||
ACT 9 10 vl8k figs-idiom ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 he said **Behold, I** is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 u3e1 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 mn24 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 go to the street which is called Straight Here, the word **arising** means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 kopv figs-activepassive τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 pyr2 translate-names τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 **Straight** is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 ie1l Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas **Judas** it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in [1:13](../01/13.md), [1:16](../01/16.md), and [5:37](../05/37.md) for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 u5j8 translate-names Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα 1 a man named Saul, from Tarsus **Tarsus** is the name of a city. Alternate translation: “a man named Saul from the city of Tarsus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 k3ve figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται 1 The Lord says **behold** to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 12 jk46 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 laying hands on him In this culture, **laying hands on** people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in [6:6](../06/06.md) for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 quxn figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ πολλῶν 1 Ananias is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 sh2m figs-abstractnouns ὅσα κακὰ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 la9t figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 to your saints Ananias is using the term **saints** figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων 1 he has authority … to bind all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 hi6x figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 jmt7 figs-possession σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 this one is a chosen instrument of mine The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 gk29 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 ndxu figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul figuratively as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 z5fj figs-metaphor τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 who will carry my name The Lord says figuratively that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 h8vw figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 wh8c figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 1 The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in [4:25](../04/25.md). Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 bbfd figs-synecdoche βασιλέων 1 The Lord is using **kings**, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 uq9b figs-metaphor υἱῶν…Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 s8ms figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../01/32.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 q61x figs-you σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 cah9 figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 **Brother** is a figurative title that Ananias is using for **Saul**. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my kinsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 cxu4 figs-nominaladj ὁ ὀφθείς σοι 1 Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 ptg0 figs-go ᾗ ἤρχου 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 a89q figs-activepassive ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit If your language does not use the passive form **filled**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 x4ey figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Ananias is speaking figuratively as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 18 m1hx translate-unknown λεπίδες 1 something like scales fell It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the **scales** that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 18 efs9 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 rising up, he was baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 19 rxfi figs-activepassive ἐνισχύθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 20 rc49 writing-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 20 w65r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 xid8 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 all who were hearing Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 a8j8 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἀκούοντες…ὁ πορθήσας…τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους 1 Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 f4fd figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name? The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 ctg3 figs-explicit τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 this name By **this name** the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 l82i figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 zuoi figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 locy figs-rquestion καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς? 1 This could be: (1) a continuation of the rhetorical question in the first part of the quotation. (ULT starts a new sentence here, but the entire quotation may be a single sentence.) If you would not use a rhetorical question in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And he had come here for this, to arrest them and bring them to the chief priests!” (2) a statement that the people in Damascus are making to give a further reason for their surprise. Alternate translation: “Indeed, he had come here for this, to arrest them and bring them to the chief priests.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 i512 figs-activepassive ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 22 r1np figs-explicit καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 was stirring up the Jews Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 cg9k figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 nyh4 figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 g74c figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This refers to the leaLuke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])ders of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 g6gw writing-pronouns αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 gnm1 figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of **But** in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 cy9n figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο…τὰς πύλας…ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 indeed they were watching the gates The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** figuratively to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (1) Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 9 25 lc8m figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 27 abca writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς…ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ…ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 told them The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 27 abcb translate-names Βαρναβᾶς 1 he had seen **Barnabas** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 cgb1 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 m5rs writing-pronouns ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 he was with them The pronoun **he** refers to Saul. The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 r6ok figs-idiom εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος 1 This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 fbb7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord See how you translated the similar expression in [9:27](../09/27.md). Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 29 d7lm translate-names Ἑλληνιστάς 1 debated with the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
|
||
ACT 9 29 lgqe figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν 1 The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 uz9a figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 j4mt figs-idiom κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 they brought him down to Caesarea Luke uses the phrase **brought him down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 sent him away to Tarsus Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably **sent** Saul **to Tarsus** by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 fh2g figs-abstractnouns εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 elq7 figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 being built up and going on If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could say “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 vx51 figs-metaphor οἰκοδομουμένη 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Here, **journeying** figuratively means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 z59s πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
|
||
ACT 9 31 hl24 figs-possession τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 in the comfort of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the possessive form to describe **the Holy Spirit** as the one who was giving the church **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 w68g writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 m9sg figs-hyperbole διὰ πάντων 1 throughout the whole region Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 ad7g figs-idiom κατελθεῖν 1 to come down Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 tckc figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 g5c4 translate-names Λύδδα 1 in Lydda **Lydda** is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 hzd7 εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα 1 he found there a certain man The word **found** does not ean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
|
||
ACT 9 33 jnc4 writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 a certain man named Aeneas Luke uses this sentence to introduce **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 owf3 translate-names Αἰνέαν 1 **Aeneas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 uj5f writing-background ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 lying in a bed … who was paralyzed In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 k7hw grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 paralyzed The reason why Aeneas had been **lying in a bed for eight years** was that he **was paralyzed**. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 9 34 t13n ἀνάστηθι 1 **Arise** in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
|
||
ACT 9 34 ff2a figs-rpronouns ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 make your bed Peter says **for yourself** to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you can make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 34 khrm translate-symaction στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/ translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 wykn writing-pronouns εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Aeneas. The pronoun **who** refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 z3fp figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 qkv4 translate-names καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 in Lydda and in Sharon **Sharon** is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 pf23 figs-explicit εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 saw him The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 x9yw figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 and they turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** figuratively means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 zgq5 writing-newevent δέ 1 Now there was Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 gy8u translate-names Ἰόππῃ 1 General Information: **Joppa** is the name of a city that was about 15 kilometers or about 10 miles from Lydda. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 gwr4 translate-names Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς 1 Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.” **Tabitha** was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and **Dorcas** was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 z8la figs-activepassive λέγεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 q2rn figs-metaphor πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 full of good works Alternate translatLuke speaks figuratively of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])ion: “doing many good things”
|
||
ACT 9 37 mg72 figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 And it happened that in those days The phrase **in those days** refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 y8sx figs-explicit λούσαντες…αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν 1 having washed her This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 znj4 figs-explicit ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ 1 they laid her in an upper room This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 lbrl translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 38 qlp8 figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 9 38 pukn figs-youdual παρακαλοῦντες 1 Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, **urging** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 k1se figs-idiom ἀναστὰς…Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς 1 to the upper room Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 tdrr figs-youdual αὐτοῖς 1 This first instance of **them** in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of **them** would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 me79 figs-hyperbole πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 all the widows Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 piu7 figs-explicit χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς 1 widows It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these **coats and garments** to help these **widows** because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 y6q5 figs-euphemism μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα 1 while being with them This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 9 40 yp2u translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα 1 put out all of them Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 40 wr7h figs-imperative Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “I restore you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
|
||
ACT 9 40 k28m translate-symaction Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/ translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 r7n6 figs-explicit δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 b73s figs-infostructure τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows These **saints** and **widows** were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 ex8e figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Luke is using the term **saints** figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 And this became known throughout all Joppa If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 43 qar2 translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner A **tanner** is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>- Verses 1-2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])<br><br>- In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles.<br>- In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together.<br><br>- The long sentence in verses 36-38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Jews visiting with Gentiles<br><br>The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Baptism and the Holy Spirit<br><br>Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
|
||
ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 h6zu translate-names Κορνήλιος 1 **Cornelius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 x476 translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχης 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 abcd Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 h2a4 translate-unknown Σπείρης 1 A **regiment** was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your languge that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 e88y translate-names Ἰταλικῆς 1 **Italian** is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 s6rh figs-doublet εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 devout and fearing God The word **devout** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next nore for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 rz4h figs-explicit εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 abce figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 to the people Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the people** refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 imrx figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 w2kx figs-hyperbole δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός 1 praying to God through all The phrase **through all**, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 up3j figs-explicit ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 ttsl figs-idiom ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 z5ty translate-ordinal ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 abcf writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 But he stared at him The pronoun **he** stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun **him** stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 bd2h τί ἐστιν, κύριε 1 Cornelius uses the respectful title **lord** because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in [9:5](../09/05.md).
|
||
ACT 10 4 abcg writing-pronouns εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him The pronoun **he** stands for the angel, and the pronoun **him** stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God A **memorial offering** was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering figuratively to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 xpa1 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 5 h33i figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 6 hou9 figs-activepassive ξενίζεται παρά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 6 bw0q translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 See how you translated the term **tanner** in [9:43](../09/43.md).
|
||
ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
|
||
ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout The adjective **devout** describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
|
||
ACT 10 8 pcg2 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα 1 having told them everything By **everything**, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 ey9n writing-pronouns ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων 1 The demonstrative pronoun **those** refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 tu7n translate-unknown περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 at about the sixth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 r6l8 translate-ordinal περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 went up to the housetop If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 10 im7x figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him Luke speaks figuratively of this **vision** as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 11 n4hi θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 he sees the sky having been opened To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
|
||
ACT 10 11 u9u4 figs-activepassive τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 like a large sheet … by four corners If your language does not use the passive form **opened**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 11 jh1m figs-activepassive καθιέμενον 1 being let down by four corners If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 12 fdt3 figs-hyperbole πάντα τὰ 1 The word **all** is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 12 ua3j figs-explicit καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky From Peter’s response in the next verse, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 13 a2z4 figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 a voice came to him Luke speaks figuratively of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 13 zmeg figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 z7r5 figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 Not at all **Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 p0bf figs-doublet κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **defiled** and **unclean** mean similar things. Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 a2jj figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defiled and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 15 xs5s figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 What God has cleansed If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 10 15 as42 figs-personification φωνὴ πάλιν…πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 16 rlr9 figs-explicit τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say “this happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 16 ej9h figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 d4zi ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν 1 Peter was very confused … about Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
|
||
ACT 10 17 n6da figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **men** appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 cg9a figs-activepassive οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 e62m figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 stood before the gate The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a **gate** in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 18 qe9d figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος 1 they called out If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 18 r91o figs-activepassive ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 19 iqx5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 Behold The Spirit is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 19 va39 translate-textvariants ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 three men are looking for you Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. As the General Introduction to Acts explains, some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 ndju figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 ym1x figs-explicit κατάβηθι 1 go down The implication is that Peter is to **go down** from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 wx4n figs-explicit πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 go with them. Do not hesitate It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 rva1 figs-quotesinquotes οἱ…εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 i4zh writing-pronouns οἱ…εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 ue5z figs-synecdoche οἱ…εἶπαν 1 One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 wvl1 figs-doublet φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **righteous** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 hrta figs-explicit ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 hihl figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 gv91 figs-hyperbole ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the whole nation of the Jews Luke says **whole** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 e15o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The messengers are using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 shs5 figs-explicit εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν 1 he hosted them The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 ycoi figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 t7cz figs-metaphor τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ…ἐπαύριον 1 the following day The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
|
||
ACT 10 25 wxt8 ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον 1 as Peter entered ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον
|
||
ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 10 26 s7n5 figs-declarative ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Get up! I too am a man myself Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 10 27 f9x6 writing-pronouns συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun **he** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 27 kdva writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found”
|
||
ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-activepassive συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 iyx6 figs-explicit ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 k3we figs-explicit ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner Here, the term **foreigner** refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 ztt0 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 tl2h figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 29 x0p4 figs-activepassive μεταπεμφθείς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 29 x0v3 figs-you μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου 1 praying Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 na4u figs-idiom ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or **Four days ago**. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 pkhh figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 x4m7 figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐνάτην 1 Cornelius is using the adjective **ninth** as a noun. ULT adds **hour** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 u1es figs-idiom τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 p73u translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 yy6e figs-explicit τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 oicx figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ 1 Cornelius is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this **man** appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 g485 figs-explicit ἀνὴρ 1 Luke says in [10:3](../01/32.md) that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him **a man** here because the angel appeared to him in human form. You could say that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 twnu figs-quotesinquotes φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
|
||
ACT 10 31 uep3 φησί 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
|
||
ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 s6nz figs-idiom ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God The word **remembered** does not imply that God had forgotten about these **alms**. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 xd0x figs-idiom ἐνώπιον 1 Here the word **before** is being used idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 jjnn figs-quotesinquotes πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 ci31 figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 u1t6 figs-activepassive οὗτος ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 jhzt translate-textvariants μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα…παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 p5ee figs-yousingular σέ…σύ…σοι 1 immediately The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 ruf3 writing-politeness σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 and you did well in coming This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 lzie figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Corneluis is using the word **we** to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 ry21 figs-idiom ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Cornelius is using the word **before** idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 xt4x figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 that you have been instructed by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 jc88 translate-textvariants τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Instead of **instructed by the Lord**, some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 34 cyn8 figs-explicitinfo ἀνοίξας…Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν 1 And Peter opened his mouth and said It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 10 34 iii7 προσωπολήμπτης 1 God is not one who shows partiality Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
|
||
ACT 10 34 ha31 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός 1 In truth As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 35 b5cr ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 fears Here, **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
|
||
ACT 10 35 j78e figs-abstractnouns ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 aac8 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this **word**; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 ht1z figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 anlh figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 ok9b figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 md1l πάντων 1 he is Lord of all The word **all** could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
|
||
ACT 10 37 wecw figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ…ῥῆμα 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 37 ch65 figs-hyperbole καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 throughout all Judea Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 37 sq2i μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης 1 after the baptism that John proclaimed Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and he then baptized them”
|
||
ACT 10 38 seli figs-infostructure Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 p2qi figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 ku82 figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power Peter speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 vuwo figs-abstractnouns εὐεργετῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 y5ya figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 all who were oppressed by the devil Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 tj3u figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 God was with him The expression **was with him** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [7:9](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 kal7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες 1 Here, **we** refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 sx3a writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν 1 in the country of the Jews The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **they** refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who consipired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 z4dt figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 by hanging him on a tree This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says **tree** figuratively to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 zxuk writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 cxj5 figs-idiom τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 but God raised up this one Here, **raised … up** is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 w8kv figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 iz8l figs-activepassive ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι 1 caused him to be seen If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 nm81 figs-activepassive οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you can adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 jq89 figs-explicit παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 zpyj figs-activepassive τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 xlbl figs-synecdoche οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is figuratively using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 q7d1 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 ik96 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 zne5 figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 Connecting Statement: By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 c1ak figs-activepassive ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 that he is the one who has been chosen by God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 ws4t figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 of the living and the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 43 ub5d writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 To this one, all the prophets bear witness that The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Peter is speaking figuratively of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
|
||
ACT 10 44 wf7u figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 all of those who were listening While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 44 o839 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 j6wt figs-nominaladj οἱ…πιστοὶ 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 qlpu figs-metonymy ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 Luke is using the term **circumcision** figuratively by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 g161 figs-activepassive ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 mqs8 figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 was poured out Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 hfs9 figs-possession ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is using a possessive form to identify **the Holy Spirit** as a **gift** from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 f33n figs-explicit καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 also on the Gentiles Here, **also** refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 rt18 translate-names τὰ ἔθνη 1 **Gentiles** is a name for people who are not Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 10 46 p6pa figs-explicit λαλούντων γλώσσαις 1 speaking with tongues and praising God The implication is that at least some of these **languages** were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 zktm figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he**. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 vuax figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb **withhold** and the negative particle **not**. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 df24 figs-synecdoche τὸ ὕδωρ 1 Peter is figuratively using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 kwv5 figs-activepassive τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 48 z4fh figs-activepassive προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **in the name** is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in [10:43](../10/43.md). See how you translated the similar expression in [2:48](../02/48.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”<br><br>Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
|
||
ACT 11 1 uw5m δὲ 1 **Now** signals the beginning of a new event in the story.
|
||
ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 1 f1md οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers The phrase **the brothers** here refers to the believers in Judea.
|
||
ACT 11 1 q8wl οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν 1 who were throughout Judea Alternate translation: “who were throughout the province of Judea”
|
||
ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “had believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 2 j7f7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.
|
||
ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it.
|
||
ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 3 ah7v figs-metonymy ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας 1 uncircumcised men The phrase **uncircumcised men** refers to Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 3 t9e1 συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς 1 ate with them It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.
|
||
ACT 11 4 lrh6 0 Connecting Statement: Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius’ house.
|
||
ACT 11 4 bfp5 ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο 1 Peter began to explain Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner.
|
||
ACT 11 4 nuy6 καθεξῆς 1 in an orderly manner Alternate translation: “exactly what happened”
|
||
ACT 11 5 j37p ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην 1 like a large sheet The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md).
|
||
ACT 11 5 axu6 τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς 1 by its four corners See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners”
|
||
ACT 11 6 lbh4 figs-explicit τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 6 ew64 θηρία 1 wild beasts Here, **wild beasts** probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control.
|
||
ACT 11 6 t36i ἑρπετὰ 1 creeping animals These are reptiles.
|
||
ACT 11 7 i5ic figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα…καὶ φωνῆς 1 I heard … a voice The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated **a voice** in [Acts 10:13](../10/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 m4mu μηδαμῶς 1 By no means See how you translated this in [Acts 10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “I will not do that”
|
||
ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **profane or unclean … never entered**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 kj91 ἀκάθαρτον 1 unclean In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually **unclean** in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.
|
||
ACT 11 9 n2gn figs-metonymy ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 What God has cleansed, do not call unclean This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 10 xrq6 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated **This happened three times** in [Acts 10:16](../10/16.md).
|
||
ACT 11 11 ias8 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here, **we** refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 11 b2qv ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
|
||
ACT 11 11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 right away Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
|
||
ACT 11 11 qwn5 figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 having been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 12 lf6m μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction Alternate translation: “not being concerned that they were Gentiles”
|
||
ACT 11 12 cf8x ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ 1 went with me Alternate translation: “went with me to Caesarea”
|
||
ACT 11 12 xrc6 οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers”
|
||
ACT 11 12 w6ia εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man This refers to the house of Cornelius.
|
||
ACT 11 13 few6 Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
|
||
ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household This refers to all the people in the **household**. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 a8jw ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
|
||
ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-ellipsis ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he also came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 th4m ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
|
||
ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive αὐτοῖς…ἡμῖν 1 The word **them** refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word **us** includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν? 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 y7ag τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν 1 the same gift Peter refers to the **gift** of the Holy Spirit.
|
||
ACT 11 18 xlpt ἀκούσαντες…ἡσύχασαν 1 The word **they** refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke.
|
||
ACT 11 18 nr7g ἡσύχασαν 1 they became quiet Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter”
|
||
ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same ideas with the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then This introduces the new part of the story. He tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 m3i7 οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because **Stephen** had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this **persecution**, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.
|
||
ACT 11 19 whm6 figs-activepassive οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jews had been persecuting after they killed Stephen, who had left Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 w5jn διῆλθον 1 spread Alternate translation: “went in many different directions”
|
||
ACT 11 19 c8ha μόνον Ἰουδαίοις 1 only to Jews The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.
|
||
ACT 11 20 mww9 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 and spoke also to Greeks These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “and also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 The hand of the Lord was with them God’s **hand** signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 22 i7vs figs-metonymy τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 the ears of the church Here, **ears** refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 23 mrg9 ὃς…ἰδὼν…ἐχάρη…παρεκάλει 1 All occurrences of the word **he** refer to Barnabas. The word **them** refers to the new believers ([Acts 11:20](../11/20.md)).
|
||
ACT 11 23 b7w7 ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 saw the grace that is of God Alternate translation: “saw how God acted kindly toward the believers”
|
||
ACT 11 23 m1q9 παρεκάλει πάντας 1 exhorted them all Alternate translation: “kept on encouraging them”
|
||
ACT 11 23 qlu4 προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 to remain with the Lord Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to the Lord” or “to continue to trust in the Lord”
|
||
ACT 11 23 bz6w figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 with purpose of heart Here the **heart** refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 he5z πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 full of the Holy Spirit The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.
|
||
ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Here, **added** means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 25 yhl6 ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here the word **he** refers to Barnabas.
|
||
ACT 11 25 dm92 ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς Ταρσὸν 1 he went out to Tarsus Alternate translation: “he went out to the city of Tarsus”
|
||
ACT 11 26 hu2g καὶ εὑρὼν 1 and when he found him It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.
|
||
ACT 11 26 wf5l writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 It happened that This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 w4dz αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 they were gathered together with the church Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were gathered together with the church”
|
||
ACT 11 26 x8gx figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι τε πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς 1 And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch This implies that other people called the believers by this name. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch were the first to call the disciples Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 r6sl πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ 1 first in Antioch Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
|
||
ACT 11 27 h6zw δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.
|
||
ACT 11 27 pz7y writing-background 0 General Information: Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 11 27 d8bb κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioch Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going **down** from it.
|
||
ACT 11 28 wyk8 ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 named Agabus Alternate translation: “whose name was Agabus”
|
||
ACT 11 28 q3tl ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that”
|
||
ACT 11 28 l3iz λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι 1 a great famine was about to occur Alternate translation: “a great shortage of food would happen”
|
||
ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world Here, **whole** was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Luke’s audience would know that **Claudius** was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 **Claudius** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 29 de92 δὲ 1 So The word **So** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine.
|
||
ACT 11 29 rk9z καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις 1 just as anyone prospered The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.
|
||
ACT 11 29 up7a τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Alternate translation: “to the believers in Judea”
|
||
ACT 11 30 lhp8 καὶ ἐποίησαν 1 Here, **they** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch ([Acts 11:27](../11/27.md)).
|
||
ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-idiom διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, **hand** is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Personification<br><br>The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 ua9p 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release.
|
||
ACT 12 1 ti1y writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 f2gr κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν 1 about that time Here, **that time** refers to the time of the famine.
|
||
ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-idiom ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid hands on This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in [Acts 5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 u1gv figs-explicit τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 some of those from the church Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 s7lc κακῶσαί 1 to harm them Alternate translation: “in order to cause the believers to suffer”
|
||
ACT 12 2 u4w7 writing-background ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ 1 This is background information about Herod’s killing **James**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-metonymy ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James This could mean: (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 12 3 pms7 ἰδὼν…προσέθετο 1 Here the word **he** refers to Herod ([Acts 12:1](../12/01.md)).
|
||
ACT 12 3 v4ag ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders”
|
||
ACT 12 3 cu7s ὅτι…ἐστιν 1 that this is Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened”
|
||
ACT 12 3 wpm1 ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “made the Jewish leaders happy”
|
||
ACT 12 3 ly66 ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This phrase refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast”
|
||
ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers Each squad had four **soldiers** that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers”
|
||
ACT 12 4 i23a βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people”
|
||
ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-explicit ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter **in the prison**. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night That Herod planned to execute him can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 6 g2bh δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. Alternate translation: “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains”
|
||
ACT 12 6 aqv1 ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν 1 were keeping watch over the prison Alternate translation: “were guarding the prison doors”
|
||
ACT 12 7 kk4i ἐπέστη…αὐτὸν…αὐτοῦ 1 The words **him** and **his** refer to Peter.
|
||
ACT 12 7 i7g3 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
|
||
ACT 12 7 lu25 ἐπέστη 1 appeared by him Alternate translation: “appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him”
|
||
ACT 12 7 z2i1 ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι 1 in the prison cell Alternate translation: “in the prison room”
|
||
ACT 12 7 dc5b πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου 1 he struck Peter Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. Alternate translation: “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter”
|
||
ACT 12 7 dqn9 ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν 1 his chains fell away from his hands The angel caused the **chains** to fall from Peter without touching them.
|
||
ACT 12 8 hxt9 ἐποίησεν…οὕτως 1 he did thus Alternate translation: “Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed”
|
||
ACT 12 8 abch λέγει αὐτῷ 1 he said to him Alternate translation: “the angel said to Peter”
|
||
ACT 12 9 gx77 ἠκολούθει…ᾔδει…ἐδόκει 1 Here the word **he** refers to Peter.
|
||
ACT 12 9 abci ἠκολούθει 1 he followed him Alternate translation: “Peter followed the angel”
|
||
ACT 12 9 sh8k οὐκ ᾔδει 1 he did not know Alternate translation: “he did not understand”
|
||
ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 what is done by the angel is real If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 ursb διελθόντες…ἦλθαν…αὐτοῖς…προῆλθον 1 The words **they** and **them** refer to Peter and the angel.
|
||
ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 c18q διελθόντες 1 when they had passed by Alternate translation: “when they had walked by”
|
||
ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 y86k ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν 1 they came to the iron gate Alternate translation: “Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate”
|
||
ACT 12 10 if3c τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 that led into the city Alternate translation: “that opened to the city” or “that went from the prison to the city”
|
||
ACT 12 10 i3st figs-rpronouns ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς 1 it opened for them by itself Here, **by itself** means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: “the gate swung open for them” or “the gate opened itself for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 j268 προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν 1 they went down a street Alternate translation: “they walked along a street”
|
||
ACT 12 10 fl89 εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 right away the angel went away from him Alternate translation: “the angel left Peter suddenly” or “suddenly the angel disappeared”
|
||
ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος 1 And when Peter had come to himself This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “And when Peter became fully awake and alert” or “And when Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **the hand of Herod** refers to “Herod’s power” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 hw63 ἐξείλατό με 1 delivered me Alternate translation: “rescued me”
|
||
ACT 12 11 p739 figs-synecdoche πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people Here, **the Jewish people** probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 12 tfh3 συνιδών 1 having realized this He became aware that God had rescued him.
|
||
ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark **John** was also called **Mark**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 13 pfn7 κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. Alternate translation: “when Peter knocked”
|
||
ACT 12 13 c634 τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 at the door of the gate Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”
|
||
ACT 12 13 khq1 προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι 1 came to answer Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking”
|
||
ACT 12 14 x5fg ἐπιγνοῦσα…οὐκ ἤνοιξεν…ἀπήγγειλεν 1 Here the words **she** and **her** all refer to the servant girl Rhoda.
|
||
ACT 12 14 y2ff ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 from joy Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited”
|
||
ACT 12 14 m3m7 οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα 1 she did not open the gate Alternate translation: “she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door”
|
||
ACT 12 14 yq3r ἀπήγγειλεν 1 she reported Alternate translation: “she told them” or “she said”
|
||
ACT 12 14 a19k ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 stands at the gate Peter was still standing outside. Alternate translation: “is standing outside the door”
|
||
ACT 12 15 j2kx οἱ…οἱ 1 Here the word **they** refers to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)).
|
||
ACT 12 15 ybz7 μαίνῃ 1 You are insane The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy”
|
||
ACT 12 15 xnm2 ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν 1 she insisted that it was thus Alternate translation: “she insisted that what she said was true”
|
||
ACT 12 15 en8b οἱ…ἔλεγον 2 they said Alternate translation: “they answered”
|
||
ACT 12 15 qa8m ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s **angel** had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel”
|
||
ACT 12 16 wwg1 εἶδαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the people in the house.
|
||
ACT 12 16 bi6l ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων 1 But Peter continued knocking The word **continued** means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.
|
||
ACT 12 17 jx1a ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα 1 Report these things Alternate translation: “Tell these things”
|
||
ACT 12 17 jf16 τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the other believers”
|
||
ACT 12 18 ail9 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.
|
||
ACT 12 18 iqv4 γενομένης…ἡμέρας 1 when it became day Alternate translation: “in the morning”
|
||
ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 12 18 ilz4 figs-abstractnouns ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **disturbance**, you could express the same ideas with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 19 blx5 αὐτὸν…εὑρὼν…διέτριβεν 1 The word **him** here refers to Peter. The word **he** refers to Herod.
|
||
ACT 12 19 pz6v Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him This could mean: (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.”
|
||
ACT 12 19 c69i ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι 1 questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill **the guards** if their prisoner escaped.
|
||
ACT 12 19 br16 καὶ κατελθὼν 1 And having gone down The phrase **having gone down** is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.
|
||
ACT 12 20 n2lw 0 Connecting Statement: Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life.
|
||
ACT 12 20 aip7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 gxs4 figs-hyperbole ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 they went to him together Here the word **they** is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 t6mi πείσαντες Βλάστον 1 having persuaded Blastus Alternate translation: “these men persuaded Blastus”
|
||
ACT 12 20 qsg4 translate-names Βλάστον 1 Blastus **Blastus** was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 l5r1 ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην 1 they asked for peace Alternate translation: “these men requested peace”
|
||
ACT 12 20 j253 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 their food for their country was from the king’s country They probably purchased this **food**. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 dy51 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν 1 their food It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of **food** because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 21 e3w9 τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day This was probably the **day** on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them”
|
||
ACT 12 21 kv7g ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν 1 in royal clothing This **royal clothing** was expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king.
|
||
ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
|
||
ACT 12 23 b4bc παραχρῆμα…ἄγγελος 1 immediately an angel Alternate translation: “right away an angel” or “while the people were still praising Herod, an angel”
|
||
ACT 12 23 b5s9 ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν 1 struck him Alternate translation: “afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill”
|
||
ACT 12 23 iw57 οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.
|
||
ACT 12 23 d419 figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 becoming worm-eaten, he died Here, **worm** refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied The **word of God** is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 wn8m ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Alternate translation: “the message God sent about Jesus”
|
||
ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory 0 This verse continues the history from [11:30](../11/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 t7d8 Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Although some ancient copies read “Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem,” the reading of “to Jerusalem” is probably correct. We know they went back to Antioch from Jerusalem, Therefore, this verse may indicate that they went somewhere else in Judea, and then returned to Jerusalem before they went back to Antioch.
|
||
ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in [Acts 11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “when they had delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.<br><br>The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### A light for the Gentiles<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 ce7s writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word “they” probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words “they” and “their” probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 qa2i 0 Connecting Statement: Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.
|
||
ACT 13 1 rej8 δὲ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Now there were in Antioch, in the church that was there Alternate translation: “At that time in the church at Antioch”
|
||
ACT 13 1 srw6 translate-names Συμεὼν…Νίγερ…Λούκιος…Μαναήν 1 Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 u48c Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος 1 one brought up with Herod the tetrarch Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up. Some scholars suggest he was Herod’s foster brother.
|
||
ACT 13 2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Set apart Alternate translation: “Appoint to serve”
|
||
ACT 13 2 j6ym προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς 1 I have called them The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.
|
||
ACT 13 3 ku45 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 1 laid their hands on them This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. Alternate translation: “laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 3 p1us ἀπέλυσαν 1 they sent them off Alternate translation: “they sent those men off” or “they sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do”
|
||
ACT 13 4 br2m 0 General Information: Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas.
|
||
ACT 13 4 mt3h οὖν 1 So This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.
|
||
ACT 13 4 abcj αὐτοὶ…ἐκπεμφθέντες 1 they, having been sent out Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were sent out”
|
||
ACT 13 4 iyh8 κατῆλθον 1 went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.
|
||
ACT 13 4 d1q5 Σελεύκιαν 1 Seleucia a city by the sea
|
||
ACT 13 5 at85 Σαλαμῖνι 1 Salamis The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.
|
||
ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-synecdoche κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 5 p5t3 συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 synagogues of the Jews This could mean: (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”
|
||
ACT 13 5 sxw6 εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην 1 And they also had John as an assistant Alternate translation: “And John Mark went with them and was helping them”
|
||
ACT 13 6 h9he εὗρον 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.
|
||
ACT 13 6 ja1i ὅλην τὴν νῆσον 1 the whole island They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
|
||
ACT 13 6 cl2z Πάφου 1 Paphos **Paphos** was a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived.
|
||
ACT 13 6 zf3b εὗρον 1 they found Here, **found** means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”
|
||
ACT 13 6 xe7h ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον 1 a certain man, a magician Alternate translation: “a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts”
|
||
ACT 13 6 ak38 translate-names ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 1 whose name was Bar Jesus **Bar Jesus** means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. **Jesus** was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 7 bee2 ἦν σὺν 1 was with Alternate translation: “was often with” or “was often in the company of”
|
||
ACT 13 7 s1su ἀνθυπάτῳ 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
|
||
ACT 13 7 h5xx writing-background ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ 1 an intelligent man This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 13 7 abck οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος 1 He summoned Alternate translation: “The proconsul summoned”
|
||
ACT 13 8 lp2u translate-names Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος 1 Elymas “the magician” This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 8 qw4j οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for that is how his name is translated Alternate translation: “for that was what he was called in Greek”
|
||
ACT 13 8 n23s ἀνθίστατο…αὐτοῖς…ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον 1 opposed them; he sought to turn the proconsul away Alternate translation: “resisted them by trying to turn the proconsul away” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn the proconsul away”
|
||
ACT 13 8 w2xt figs-metaphor ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith Here, **to turn … away from** is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 9 gws2 αὐτὸν 1 The word **him** refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus ([Acts 13:6-8](./06.md)).
|
||
ACT 13 9 ey6d figs-activepassive Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος 1 Saul, who is also Paul **Saul** was his Jewish name, and **Paul** was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 9 xjy9 ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν 1 stared at him intensely Alternate translation: “looked at him intensely”
|
||
ACT 13 10 r8x2 ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 O one full of all deceit and all wickedness Alternate translation: “O you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong”
|
||
ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-metonymy υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil Paul is saying the man is acting like **the devil**. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 pyu7 ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 wickedness In this context, **wickedness** means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law.
|
||
ACT 13 10 hlq9 ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 enemy of all righteousness Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an **enemy** of God and is against **righteousness**, so also was Elymas.
|
||
ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-idiom τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Here, **straight paths** refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 xul9 figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 the hand of the Lord upon you Here, **hand** represents the power of God and **upon you** implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 rse8 figs-activepassive ἔσῃ τυφλὸς 1 you will be blind If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 w3gh μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 not seeing the sun Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see **the sun**. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun”
|
||
ACT 13 11 b5b8 ἄχρι καιροῦ 1 for a time Alternate translation: “for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God”
|
||
ACT 13 11 t7j1 ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 a mist and darkness fell on Elymas Alternate translation: “the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything”
|
||
ACT 13 11 a7es περιάγων 1 he is going around Alternate translation: “Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and”
|
||
ACT 13 12 x9fl ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
|
||
ACT 13 12 pyh7 ἐπίστευσεν 1 believed Alternate translation: “believed in Jesus”
|
||
ACT 13 12 twa8 figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 being astonished at the teaching of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 13 r9hi δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks the beginning of a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.
|
||
ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. Here, **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 13 13 abcl οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 those around Paul This refers to Paul and his companions.
|
||
ACT 13 13 k4s9 ἀναχθέντες…ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου 1 having set sail from Paphos Alternate translation: “having traveled by sailboat from Paphos”
|
||
ACT 13 13 h1cb ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας 1 came to Perga in Pamphylia Alternate translation: “arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia”
|
||
ACT 13 13 g6l5 Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 But John, withdrawing from them Alternate translation: “But John Mark, leaving Paul and Barnabas”
|
||
ACT 13 14 vrp1 Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν 1 Antioch of Pisidia Alternate translation: “the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia”
|
||
ACT 13 15 dnb4 figs-synecdoche μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 And after the reading of the law and of the prophets The phrase **the law and the prophets** refers to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 z7bh ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες 1 sent to them, saying Alternate translation: “told someone to say to them” or “asked someone to tell them”
|
||
ACT 13 15 td4h ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The term **brothers** is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
|
||
ACT 13 15 jru8 εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people”
|
||
ACT 13 15 kj1h λέγετε 1 speak it Alternate translation: “please speak it” or “please tell it to us”
|
||
ACT 13 16 p93q 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.
|
||
ACT 13 16 i8pz translate-symaction κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ 1 motioned with his hand This phrase could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 rh93 οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 ones who fear God This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”
|
||
ACT 13 16 ah55 τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε 1 God, listen Alternate translation: “God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say”
|
||
ACT 13 17 se2b ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ 1 The God of this people Israel Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
|
||
ACT 13 17 tbc4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **our** refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 l9cn τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Alternate translation: “our ancestors”
|
||
ACT 13 17 aaj5 τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people Alternate translation: “caused our people to become very numerous”
|
||
ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 b74t ἐξ αὐτῆς 1 from it Alternate translation: “out from the land of Egypt”
|
||
ACT 13 18 zv9e ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”
|
||
ACT 13 19 nvp7 figs-exclusive καθελὼν…κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 Here the word **he** refers to God. The word **them** refers to the people of Israel. The words **their land** refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 19 h5qg ἔθνη 1 nations Here the word **nations** refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.
|
||
ACT 13 20 abcm ἔδωκεν 1 he gave them Alternate translation: “God gave them”
|
||
ACT 13 20 qmc8 ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet Alternate translation: “until the time of the prophet Samuel”
|
||
ACT 13 21 yxi8 ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 for 40 years Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years”
|
||
ACT 13 22 z4x3 μεταστήσας αὐτὸν 1 having removed him This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king”
|
||
ACT 13 22 bsp6 ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα 1 he raised up David for them as their king Alternate translation: “God chose David to be their king”
|
||
ACT 13 22 iyd6 βασιλέα 1 their king Alternate translation: “the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites”
|
||
ACT 13 22 sw2r ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας 1 to whom having testified, he also said Alternate translation: “about whom God testified by saying”
|
||
ACT 13 22 akg6 εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament.
|
||
ACT 13 22 dbu5 εὗρον 1 I have found Alternate translation: “I have observed that”
|
||
ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants ([Acts 13:22](../13/22.md)). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants”
|
||
ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 mk5g κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 according to promise Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do”
|
||
ACT 13 24 abcn πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus”
|
||
ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 lby6 τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 The quotation here is from the Gospels.
|
||
ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 rp32 figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 nnl5 ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ 1 But behold This phrase emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
|
||
ACT 13 25 r1pl figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ 1 one is coming after me This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel **worthy** do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes”
|
||
ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 kci9 ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.
|
||
ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 psk5 τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this one Alternate translation: “did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them”
|
||
ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Here the word **voices** represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 rle6 τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν 1 they fulfilled the voices of the prophets Alternate translation: “they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do”
|
||
ACT 13 28 v3hw 0 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word **him** here refers to Jesus.
|
||
ACT 13 28 y9j6 μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες 1 they found no reason for death Alternate translation: “they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus”
|
||
ACT 13 28 d4xm ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον 1 they asked Pilate The word **asked** here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for.
|
||
ACT 13 29 sq1j ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 And when they had completed all that had been written about him Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him”
|
||
ACT 13 29 m5f1 figs-explicit καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 taking him down from the tree It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-explicit τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 30 h5jw ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 But God raised him **But** indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.
|
||
ACT 13 30 mqx8 ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead To be with **the dead** means that Jesus was dead. Alternate translation: “raised him from among those who were dead”
|
||
ACT 13 30 zsx4 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 raised him Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 30 d14p ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead This phrase means “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.
|
||
ACT 13 31 ig7w figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 31 g4vl ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
|
||
ACT 13 31 vqj4 νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 are now his witnesses to the people Alternate translation: “are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus”
|
||
ACT 13 32 hr2g τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”
|
||
ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 dy6w τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
|
||
ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 y3tz ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm Alternate translation: “This is what was also written in the second Psalm”
|
||
ACT 13 33 h9ir τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 the second Psalm Alternate translation: “Psalm 2”
|
||
ACT 13 33 tla1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε 1 Son … I have fathered you **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 ipb9 δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 This quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah.
|
||
ACT 13 34 iy5q ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν 1 And that he raised him up from the dead, never to be about to return to decay, he has spoken in this way Alternate translation: “God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again”
|
||
ACT 13 34 h3nj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
|
||
ACT 13 34 q3kq τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά 1 the holy and sure blessings Alternate translation: “the holy and certain blessings”
|
||
ACT 13 35 r1ev figs-explicit διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει 1 On account of this he also says in another place Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 gl8s καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. Alternate translation: “David also says”
|
||
ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-metonymy οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay The phrase **see decay** is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 ry97 οὐ δώσεις 1 You will not allow David is speaking to God here.
|
||
ACT 13 36 u8vh ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ 1 in his own generation Alternate translation: “during his lifetime”
|
||
ACT 13 36 m5wx ὑπηρετήσας τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ βουλῇ 1 having served the counsel of God Alternate translation: “having done what God wanted him to do” or “after he had done what pleased God”
|
||
ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 nwy9 προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 was laid with his fathers Alternate translation: “was buried with his ancestors who had died”
|
||
ACT 13 36 la5s figs-metonymy εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay The phrase **saw decay** is a metonym for “his body decayed.” Alternate translation: “his body rotted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 bmw3 ὃν δὲ 1 But he whom Alternate translation: “But Jesus whom”
|
||
ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up Here, **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 j52x figs-metonymy οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay The phrase **did not see decay** is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 yg35 γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you Alternate translation: “know this” or “this is important for you to know”
|
||
ACT 13 38 qy18 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul uses the term **brothers** because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”
|
||
ACT 13 38 t3i5 figs-activepassive ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-abstractnouns ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν 1 forgiveness of sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 39 ki8q τούτῳ 1 Here the term **this one** refers to Jesus.
|
||
ACT 13 39 j6rr ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων 1 In this one every one who believes Alternate translation: “By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him”
|
||
ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-explicit βλέπετε 1 be careful that It is implied that the thing they should **be careful** about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 40 tt1x τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 the thing spoken about in the prophets Alternate translation: “what the prophets spoke about”
|
||
ACT 13 41 tqk5 ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί 1 Look, you despisers Alternate translation: “Look, you who feel contempt” or “Look, you who ridicule”
|
||
ACT 13 41 ky3s θαυμάσατε 1 be astonished Alternate translation: “be amazed” or “be shocked”
|
||
ACT 13 41 ilh2 καὶ ἀφανίσθητε 1 and perish Alternate translation: “and die”
|
||
ACT 13 41 kk1j ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word **I** refers to God.
|
||
ACT 13 41 dvn1 ἔργον ἐργάζομαι 1 am doing a work Alternate translation: “am doing something”
|
||
ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days Alternate translation: “during your lifetime”
|
||
ACT 13 41 w6tq ἔργον ὃ 1 A work that Alternate translation: “I am doing something which”
|
||
ACT 13 41 p4c2 ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 even if someone would announce it to you Alternate translation: “even if someone would tell you about it”
|
||
ACT 13 42 ax8v ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving Alternate translation: “When Paul and Barnabas were leaving”
|
||
ACT 13 42 f3sw παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Alternate translation: “the people begged them”
|
||
ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 43 a58z λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended This could mean: (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.
|
||
ACT 13 43 sws7 προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism.
|
||
ACT 13 43 q2aj οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς 1 who speaking to them, urged them Alternate translation: “and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them”
|
||
ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-explicit προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to continue in the grace of God It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις συνήχθη 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city were gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **Jews** represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy Here, **jealousy** is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 nc5l ἀντέλεγον 1 spoke against Alternate translation: “contradicted” or “opposed”
|
||
ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive ὑμῖν…ἀπωθεῖσθε…στρεφόμεθα 1 The first two instances of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 as6q figs-explicit ἦν ἀναγκαῖον 1 It was necessary for This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-synecdoche ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 ms36 οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life”
|
||
ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas were implying that they would preach to **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 tx94 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-you τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word **I** refers to God and the word **you** is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 v8au figs-metaphor εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were **a light** that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 eqi5 αὐτοὺς 1 Here the word **them** refers to Paul and Barnabas.
|
||
ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 cf21 παρώτρυναν 1 stirred up Alternate translation: “convinced” or “urged on”
|
||
ACT 13 50 wmm5 τοὺς πρώτους 1 the leading men Alternate translation: “the most important men”
|
||
ACT 13 50 n7qe ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν 1 a persecution arose against Paul and Barnabas Alternate translation: “They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas”
|
||
ACT 13 50 cq9h ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out from their boundaries Alternate translation: “they removed Paul and Barnabas from their city”
|
||
ACT 13 51 t4bv ἦλθον εἰς Ἰκόνιον 1 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to **Iconium**.
|
||
ACT 13 51 abco οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι 1 But when they had shaken off Alternate translation: “But after Paul and Silas shook off”
|
||
ACT 13 51 xi1z writing-symlanguage οἱ…ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
|
||
ACT 13 52 dp5k οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples Here, **the disciples** probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.
|
||
ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “The message of his grace”<br><br>The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>### Zeus and Hermes<br><br>The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”<br><br>Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
|
||
ACT 14 1 vh8u 0 General Information: The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.
|
||
ACT 14 1 hk1z ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ 1 And it happened that Iconium This begins a new event.
|
||
ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι οὕτως 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.
|
||
ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν…τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς 1 the souls Here the word **souls** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 fu13 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.
|
||
ACT 14 3 lp4v 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to the Lord.
|
||
ACT 14 3 a3gp μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν 1 So they stayed there Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in [Acts 14:1](../14/01.md). **So** could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless they stayed there”
|
||
ACT 14 3 f2xh τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Alternate translation: “who demonstrated that the message about his grace was true”
|
||
ACT 14 3 wcn5 τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 to the word of his grace Alternate translation: “about the message of the Lord’s grace”
|
||
ACT 14 3 c2cv figs-activepassive διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-synecdoche διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 4 btu3 figs-metonymy ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 the population of the city was divided Here, **population of the city** refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 4 smz5 ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 were with the Jews The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace. Alternate translation: “supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews”
|
||
ACT 14 4 q1xc figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 with the apostles The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 14 4 mw9h τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 the apostles Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here, **apostles** might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
|
||
ACT 14 5 s5h7 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
|
||
ACT 14 5 q6g2 ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 to mistreat and stone them Alternate translation: “to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them”
|
||
ACT 14 6 tpl1 translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 of Lycaonia A district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 6 m5gv translate-names Λύστραν 1 Lystra A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe **Derbe** is a city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 7 z5nd κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν 1 and where they continued to proclaim the gospel Alternate translation: “and where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news”
|
||
ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat This phrase introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 14 8 kz7d ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Alternate translation: “unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet”
|
||
ACT 14 8 tca1 χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Alternate translation: “having been born as a cripple”
|
||
ACT 14 9 di49 ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 He looked intently at him Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man”
|
||
ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up This implies that the man’s legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air”
|
||
ACT 14 11 axe6 ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος 1 what Paul had done This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man.
|
||
ACT 14 11 lvs9 ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice Here, **raised their voice** means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
|
||
ACT 14 11 d1gz figs-explicit οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 The gods … have come down to us A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan **gods** who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 11 x3bi Λυκαονιστὶ 1 in the Lycaonian language The people of Lystra spoke **Lycaonian** and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language”
|
||
ACT 14 11 rm85 ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 being made like men These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men.
|
||
ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus **Zeus** was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes **Hermes** was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-explicit ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought It may be helpful to include additional information about the **priest**. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 v2a9 ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 oxen and wreaths The **oxen** were to be sacrificed. The **wreaths** were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.
|
||
ACT 14 13 iha1 ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας 1 to the gates The **gates** of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.
|
||
ACT 14 13 ud37 ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”
|
||
ACT 14 14 kt1f οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος 1 the apostles, Barnabas and Paul Luke is here probably using **apostles** in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
|
||
ACT 14 14 kx43 διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 they tore their clothing This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.
|
||
ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 f8vc ταῦτα ποιεῖτε 1 are you doing these things Alternate translation: “are you worshiping us”
|
||
ACT 14 15 u9pq καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 We also are men with the same feelings as you By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!”
|
||
ACT 14 15 n9e4 ὁμοιοπαθεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 with the same feelings as you Alternate translation: “like you in every way”
|
||
ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Here, **turn from … to** is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: “stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 qr5b Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God Alternate translation: “a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives”
|
||
ACT 14 16 s2rn ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς 1 In the generations gone by Alternate translation: “In previous times” or “Until now”
|
||
ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways Going in a way, or going along a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … without**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-metonymy ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Here, **your hearts** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 18 ut73 μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς 1 they barely restrained the crowds from sacrificing to them Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude **from sacrificing to them**, but it was difficult to do so.
|
||
ACT 14 18 la43 μόλις κατέπαυσαν 1 they barely restrained Alternate translation: “had difficulty preventing”
|
||
ACT 14 19 wmc2 figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 persuaded the crowds It my be helpful to explicitly state what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 19 xbv3 τοὺς ὄχλους 1 the crowds These **crowds** may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.
|
||
ACT 14 19 t8mg νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι 1 thinking him to be dead Alternate translation: “because they thought that he was already dead”
|
||
ACT 14 20 pan3 τῶν μαθητῶν 1 the disciples These **disciples** were new believers in the city of Lystra.
|
||
ACT 14 20 aqx3 εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 he entered into the city Alternate translation: “Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”
|
||
ACT 14 20 e2y9 ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην 1 he went with Barnabas to Derbe Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”
|
||
ACT 14 21 ykt4 τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην 1 in that city Alternate translation: “in Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md))
|
||
ACT 14 22 rh8q figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the **disciples**. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 zkd2 παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”
|
||
ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter Paul includes his hearers, so the word **us** is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 14 23 pk5l χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The first two occurrences of **they** here refer to Paul and Barnabas. The third occurrence of **they** refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord.
|
||
ACT 14 23 mqp9 χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”
|
||
ACT 14 23 nd87 παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς 1 they entrusted them This could mean: (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”
|
||
ACT 14 23 ls62 εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 in whom they had believed Who **they** refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers).
|
||
ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Here, **word** is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 25 h8sh κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia The phrase **went down** is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.
|
||
ACT 14 26 f2cg ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 where they had been commended to the grace of God If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had commended Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas”
|
||
ACT 14 27 vcd3 παραγενόμενοι…ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν 1 Here the words **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word **he** refers to God.
|
||
ACT 14 27 i9dv συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 gathered together the church Alternate translation: “called the local believers to meet together”
|
||
ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles God’s enabling **the Gentiles** to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into **faith**. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.<br><br>The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Brothers<br><br>In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.<br><br>### Obeying the law of Moses<br><br>Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.<br><br>### “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality”<br><br>It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
|
||
ACT 15 1 qck6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.
|
||
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “some men who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 p3k9 κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea The phrase **coming down** is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.
|
||
ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-explicit ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Here, **brothers** stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **dispute** and **debate**, you could express the same ideas with verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 ek6a ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 15 2 z983 τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου 1 this question Alternate translation: “this issue”
|
||
ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Here, **church** refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 i5kd διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι 1 passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria announcing The words **passed through** and **announcing** indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.
|
||
ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles Here, **conversion** means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **conversion**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-metaphor ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 they brought great joy to all the brothers Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if **joy** were an object that they brought to **the brothers**. Alternate translation: “what they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 bbd4 πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers.
|
||
ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 4 a2x1 μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 with them Alternate translation: “through them”
|
||
ACT 15 5 efe5 αὐτοὺς, παραγγέλλειν 1 Here both occurrences of the word **them** refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.
|
||
ACT 15 5 k6k7 δέ τινες 1 But certain ones Here Luke uses the word **But** to contrast those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
|
||
ACT 15 5 b9nt τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως 1 to keep the law of Moses Alternate translation: “to obey the law of Moses”
|
||
ACT 15 6 ugu6 ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 to see about this matter The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
|
||
ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-you αὐτούς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 The word **them** refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)). Both occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the apostles and elders present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 hxu9 0 Connecting Statement: Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law ([Acts 15:5-6](./05.md)).
|
||
ACT 15 7 a6q9 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.
|
||
ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Here, **my mouth** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 yer1 ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη 1 the Gentiles to hear Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles would hear”
|
||
ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 the word of the gospel Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, **heart** refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 p6d2 ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them Alternate translation: “witnesses to the Gentiles”
|
||
ACT 15 8 i1gc δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 giving them the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them”
|
||
ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 zs2g οὐδὲν διέκρινεν 1 he did not distinguish God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.
|
||
ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned **their hearts**. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **heart** stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 Peter includes his audience by his use of **our** and **we**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now Here, **Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
|
||
ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter uses this question to convict the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a yoke on the neck of the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Peter uses a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 bfd5 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Here, **our fathers** refers to their Jewish ancestors.
|
||
ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 12 um1p αὐτῶν 1 Here the word **them** refers to Paul and Barnabas.
|
||
ACT 15 12 d1uc πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος 1 all the crowd See how you translated this phrase in ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group”
|
||
ACT 15 12 uks6 ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God had worked Alternate translation: “God had done” or “God had caused”
|
||
ACT 15 13 vb25 αὐτοὺς 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas ([Acts 15:12](../15/12.md)).
|
||
ACT 15 13 l7mp 0 Connecting Statement: James begins to speak to the apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)).
|
||
ACT 15 13 pl6m ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ 1 brothers, listen James was probably speaking only to men. Alternate translation: “fellow believers, listen”
|
||
ACT 15 14 abct ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles Alternate translation: “graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them”
|
||
ACT 15 14 s9dn λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν 1 to take from them a people Alternate translation: “so that he might choose from among them a people”
|
||
ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, **name** refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 15 ibb2 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 16-18, James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.
|
||
ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets Here, **words** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 15 nbi1 τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν 1 this agrees with Alternate translation: “this confirms”
|
||
ACT 15 15 j4f5 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as they wrote” or “just as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 h9um ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 Here **I** refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet.
|
||
ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 ist8 figs-metonymy τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ 1 the tent of David Here, **tent** stands for David’s family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 hkw1 figs-gendernotations κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 remnant of men Here, **men** includes males and females. Alternate translation: “remnant of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 pe4l figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 may seek the Lord God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 tu21 figs-activepassive καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 my name Here, **my name** stands for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God You can make explicit in what way James does not want **to trouble** **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically **turning** towards **God**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 wx8f ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.
|
||
ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols This phrase possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the **blood** in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος. 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them **in every city** where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from **the synagogues** to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses Here, **Moses** represents the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-hyperbole κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The word **every** here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here, **church** refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas **Judas** is the name of a man. **Barsabbas** is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
|
||
ACT 15 23 kp51 ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers Here both instances of the word **brothers** refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.
|
||
ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia **Cilicia** is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ὑμᾶς…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here **us** and **we** refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 15:22](../15/22.md))
|
||
ACT 15 24 p1tl ὅτι τινὲς 1 that certain ones Alternate translation: “that some men”
|
||
ACT 15 24 kh16 οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 who were not ordered by us Alternate translation: “even though we gave no orders for them to go”
|
||
ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls Here, **souls** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “to teach things that have troubled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 15 25 c3dl ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας 1 chosen men The **men** they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)).
|
||
ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 27 j1jb figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “they themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 nt7s εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.
|
||
ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood This refers to drinking **blood** or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 rt55 πνικτῶν 1 things strangled A **strangled** animal was killed but its blood was not drained.
|
||
ACT 15 29 buy9 ἔρρωσθε 1 Farewell The word **Farewell** announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye”
|
||
ACT 15 30 khi8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.
|
||
ACT 15 30 c3uk οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch The word **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch”
|
||
ACT 15 30 usz6 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες 1 when they were dismissed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 t55a κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 they came down to Antioch The phrase **came down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 15 31 k1mr ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced”
|
||
ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **encouragement**, you could express the same idea with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 32 r65l καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being prophets themselves Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were also prophets” or “who were also prophets”
|
||
ACT 15 32 e2en τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”
|
||
ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 y2ls 0 Connecting Statement: Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.
|
||
ACT 15 33 v7pj figs-metaphor ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον 1 And after they had spent time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word **they** refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 wzw4 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to the believers in Antioch.
|
||
ACT 15 33 xv3h πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them See how you translated this in ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) Alternate translation: “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas”
|
||
ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 k6c6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys.
|
||
ACT 15 36 i1n5 ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ 1 Returning, then Alternate translation: “On our way back to Antioch” or “As we are going back”
|
||
ACT 15 36 ib2j ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Alternate translation: “let us care for the brothers” or “we should offer to help the believers”
|
||
ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 y9i9 πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. Alternate translation: “to learn how they are doing”
|
||
ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him The words **wise not** are used to say the opposite of **wise**. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 38 ht3k Παμφυλίας 1 Pamphylia **Pamphylia** was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md).
|
||
ACT 15 38 ln7w μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον 1 did not go with them in the work Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them”
|
||
ACT 15 39 u97a figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων 1 And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **disagreement**, you could express the same idea with the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-explicit διήρχετο 1 he went through The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 t81z τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 Syria and Cilicia **Syria** and **Cilicia** are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.
|
||
ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 The word **churches** refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Timothy’s circumcision<br><br>Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.<br><br>### The woman who had a spirit of divination<br><br>Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
|
||
ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 **Timothy** is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 d4ka Δέρβην 1 Derbe **Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in [Acts 14:6](../14/06.md).
|
||
ACT 16 1 u3vr ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
|
||
ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 2 rez2 ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”
|
||
ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
|
||
ACT 16 3 za93 διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”
|
||
ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Since **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 4 n46i διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν 1 The word **they** here refers to Paul, Silas ([Acts 15:40](../15/40.md)), and Timothy ([Acts 16:3](../16/03.md)).
|
||
ACT 16 4 bu6r αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”
|
||
ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 5 lv4f figs-metaphor αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia **Phrygia** is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md).
|
||
ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **word** stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 7 x1b1 figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 when they had come Here, **had come** can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 7 b539 τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”
|
||
ACT 16 8 s6l1 κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα 1 they came down to the city of Troas The phrase **came down** is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
|
||
ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 9 t6v2 ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη 1 a vision appeared to Paul Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”
|
||
ACT 16 9 hq8e παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 1 calling him Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him”
|
||
ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Coming over into Macedonia The phrase **coming over** is used because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas.
|
||
ACT 16 10 fg5h ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Here the words **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.
|
||
ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip.
|
||
ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis **Samothrace** and **Neapolis** are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces **Lydia** as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 cyk3 σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God When Luke says Lydia was **worshiping God**, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.
|
||
ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to For the Lord to cause someone to **pay attention** and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s **heart**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, **heart** stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 ddx8 figs-metaphor διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 The author speaks about the **heart** or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 ufy4 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
|
||
ACT 16 16 vyn4 writing-background παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη 1 This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ 1 a certain young female slave The phrase **a certain** introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 ymt9 πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination An evil **spirit** spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
|
||
ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 u4z8 ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately”
|
||
ACT 16 19 m1y7 οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς 1 her masters Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl”
|
||
ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square”
|
||
ACT 16 19 hf82 ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
|
||
ACT 16 20 d2rg προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 when they had brought them to the magistrates Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges”
|
||
ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These **magistrates** were rulers or judges.
|
||
ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city Here the word **our** refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 21 gna6 παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do”
|
||
ACT 16 22 r1gr αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to Paul and Silas.
|
||
ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 23 dsr3 πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods”
|
||
ACT 16 23 y4mc παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς 1 having commanded the jailer to guard them securely Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape”
|
||
ACT 16 23 zkp7 δεσμοφύλακι 1 jailer A **jailer** was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison.
|
||
ACT 16 24 a79x ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν 1 who, having received such a command Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command”
|
||
ACT 16 24 rl8c τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον 1 fastened their feet in the stocks Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks”
|
||
ACT 16 24 jug6 ξύλον 1 stocks The **stocks** was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving.
|
||
ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the **foundations** shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 27 hr9q figs-activepassive ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ 1 the jailer became awake If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself”
|
||
ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed **light** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 29 r6is εἰσεπήδησεν 1 he rushed in Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail”
|
||
ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of **Paul and Silas**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 16 30 a3h6 προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω 1 having brought them out Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail”
|
||
ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md).
|
||
ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave”
|
||
ACT 16 36 k3i6 ἐξελθόντες 1 having come out Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail”
|
||
ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 The word **us** refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here **They** refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 wc37 ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν 1 without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail”
|
||
ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Here, **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi.
|
||
ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia”
|
||
ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Misunderstandings about the Messiah<br><br>The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])<br><br>### The religion of Athens<br><br>Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
|
||
ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
|
||
ACT 17 1 b7np διοδεύσαντες 1 having passed through Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through”
|
||
ACT 17 1 q9x4 ἦλθον 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare [Acts 16:40](../16/40.md).
|
||
ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 1 yj66 figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica Here, **came** can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was”
|
||
ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks”
|
||
ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the **Scriptures** means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them”
|
||
ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for”
|
||
ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Alternate translation: “to come back to life”
|
||
ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
|
||
ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 4 nyp2 προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ 1 joined Paul Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul”
|
||
ACT 17 4 t21z σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks This refers to **Greeks** who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
|
||
ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many **leading women** joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 nuh6 ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
|
||
ACT 17 5 uj43 figs-metaphor ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were **jealous** because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 btw6 προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace Here, **having taken** does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
|
||
ACT 17 5 lc6g ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 certain wicked men The word **men** here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men”
|
||
ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square”
|
||
ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar Here, **the city** stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the **house** and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house”
|
||
ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 abcu αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν 1 to lead them Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas”
|
||
ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob.
|
||
ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”
|
||
ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials”
|
||
ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns **Those** and **they** to refer to Paul and Silas.
|
||
ACT 17 6 c2av figs-idiom τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 have turned the inhabited world upside down This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 7 hlc9 ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 1 Jason and all these men have welcomed This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.
|
||
ACT 17 8 th2f ἐτάραξαν 1 were disturbed Alternate translation: “were worried”
|
||
ACT 17 9 ya44 λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.
|
||
ACT 17 9 bj48 τῶν λοιπῶν 1 the rest of them The words **the rest of them** refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
|
||
ACT 17 9 aru6 ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 they released them Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go”
|
||
ACT 17 10 na8h 0 General Information: Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
|
||
ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-gendernotations οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 gu6s οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than These **open-minded** people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen”
|
||
ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Here, **word** refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 uh8a μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.
|
||
ACT 17 11 lzm3 καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς 1 examining the scriptures each day Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”
|
||
ACT 17 11 g8an ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true”
|
||
ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset”
|
||
ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast”
|
||
ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul”
|
||
ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 **Athens** is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
|
||
ACT 17 16 wk63 ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου 1 This is another part of the story of **Paul** and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in **Athens** where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
|
||
ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed”
|
||
ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.
|
||
ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square”
|
||
ACT 17 18 ru6a αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 Here the words **him**, **He**, and **he** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These **Stoic philosophers** believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 dnj8 τινες ἔλεγον 1 some said Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said”
|
||
ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-metaphor τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν? 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? The word **babbler** was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 k2ps οἱ δέ 1 But others said Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said”
|
||
ACT 17 18 l41t δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι 1 He seems to be a proclaimer Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy”
|
||
ACT 17 18 sx9t ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods That is, **gods** that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
|
||
ACT 17 19 mv8c ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον 1 And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
|
||
ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus The **Areopagus** was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the **Areopagus** are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”
|
||
ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The **Areopagus** is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive βουλόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there The word **all** is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians Here, **the Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 sk5b figs-metaphor εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν 1 spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to Here, **time** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than The phrase **spent their time in nothing** is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 wr1r λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”
|
||
ACT 17 22 zq3y ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ 1 Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
|
||
ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 very religious in every way Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
|
||
ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along”
|
||
ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
|
||
ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
|
||
ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord”
|
||
ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth The words **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 built with hands Here, **hands** stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men Here, **served** has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Here, **hands** stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving The word **himself** is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 26 r3lt ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν 1 Here the word **he** refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word **their** refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth.
|
||
ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This refers to Adam, the first person God created.
|
||
ACT 17 26 js4p ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν 1 having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
|
||
ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Here, **to seek God** represents desiring to know him, and **feel around for him and find him** represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul uses the negative **not far** to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In using the word **us**, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 tkd3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words **him** and **his** refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says **we** here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 cbd9 ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ 1 For in him Alternate translation: “Because of him”
|
||
ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-metonymy τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Here, **divine being** refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-activepassive χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 30 suh6 οὖν 1 Therefore Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
|
||
ACT 17 30 iva4 τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God, having overlooked the times of ignorance Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance”
|
||
ACT 17 30 h8uy χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
|
||
ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Here, **all men** refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 htp7 ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”
|
||
ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here, **world** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 l61p πίστιν παρασχὼν 1 He has provided signs Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man”
|
||
ACT 17 31 ulr4 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
|
||
ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 Here the word **We** refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
|
||
ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.
|
||
ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
|
||
ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite **Dionysius** is a man’s name. **Areopagite** implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The baptism of John<br><br>Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
|
||
ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.
|
||
ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens”
|
||
ACT 18 1 abcw χωρισθεὶς 1 having departed Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed”
|
||
ACT 18 1 h2si τῶν Ἀθηνῶν 1 Athens **Athens** was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 17:15](../17/15.md).
|
||
ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.
|
||
ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates Luke is introducing **Aquilla** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 jat1 writing-background τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Verses 2 and 3 give background information about **Aquila** and **Priscilla**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus **Pontus** was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 q4va προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα 1 who had recently come This probably happened sometime in the past year.
|
||
ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας…τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Italy **Italy** is the name of land. **Rome** is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in [Acts 11:28](../11/28.md).
|
||
ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did”
|
||
ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed”
|
||
ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”
|
||
ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
|
||
ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 7 cd3u εἰσῆλθεν 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus **Titius Justus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 7 v8xg σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
|
||
ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 kkk9 ἀρχισυνάγωγος 1 leader of the synagogue The **leader of the synagogue** was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher.
|
||
ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-parallelism μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 10 a8lq λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”
|
||
ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 b5bf 0 Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
|
||
ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 lp79 κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 rose up together against Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack”
|
||
ACT 18 12 u36c figs-metonymy ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio **Gallio** was the Roman governor of the Province.
|
||
ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.
|
||
ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”
|
||
ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 yf81 ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 Here the word **they** probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)).
|
||
ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.
|
||
ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue **Sosthenes** was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him”
|
||
ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν 1 Here the words **He** and **he** refer to Paul. **Cenchreae** was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.”
|
||
ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 v5kl ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας 1 and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him Paul got on a ship that sailed for **Syria**. **Priscilla and Aquila** went with him.
|
||
ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a **vow**. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 18 19 abcx κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν 1 he left them Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”
|
||
ACT 18 19 st93 διελέξατο 1 reasoned with Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with”
|
||
ACT 18 20 u44s ἐρωτώντων 1 Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus.
|
||
ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them”
|
||
ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey.
|
||
ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea”
|
||
ACT 18 22 r26z ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase **gone up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
|
||
ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Here, **church** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 n3rh κατέβη 1 he went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left”
|
||
ACT 18 23 pr6u Φρυγίαν 1 **Phrygia** is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md).
|
||
ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background Ἀπολλῶς 1 **Apollos** is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line.
|
||
ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing **Apollos** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 t4zi ἀνὴρ λόγιος 1 an eloquent man Alternate translation: “a good speaker”
|
||
ACT 18 24 bh25 δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly”
|
||
ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here, **spirit** refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s **baptism** which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”
|
||
ACT 18 26 muc2 Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with **Priscilla and Aquila**.
|
||
ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully”
|
||
ACT 18 27 c2sq αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ 1 Here the he words **he** and **him** refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)).
|
||
ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia”
|
||
ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md).
|
||
ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 i5ij figs-explicit οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 You can make explicit that **the brothers** are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 q5f2 ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς 1 and wrote to the disciples Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”
|
||
ACT 18 27 f99p τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”
|
||
ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong”
|
||
ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Baptism<br><br>John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.<br><br>### Temple of Diana<br><br>The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
|
||
ACT 19 1 lp23 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
|
||
ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus.
|
||
ACT 19 1 rhv1 Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 The **upper parts** was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of **Ephesus**. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
|
||
ACT 19 1 ati9 διελθόντα 1 passed through Alternate translation: “traveled through”
|
||
ACT 19 2 wqi4 εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
|
||
ACT 19 2 nvn4 οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν 1 we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit”
|
||
ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 4 pv7t τὸν ἐρχόμενον 1 the one who is coming Here, **the one** refers to Jesus.
|
||
ACT 19 4 q5fh τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν 1 the one who is coming after him This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
|
||
ACT 19 5 k9st ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized Here, **they** refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)),
|
||
ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed **his hands** on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”
|
||
ACT 19 6 j4n8 ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy Unlike in [Acts 2:3-4](../02/03.md), there are no details of who understood their messages.
|
||
ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many **men** were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”
|
||
ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”
|
||
ACT 19 8 v8et figs-metonymy περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-metaphor τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 some were hardened and being disobedient To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming **hardened** and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 n6ir figs-metaphor κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase **the Way** seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md))
|
||
ACT 19 9 ts8d κακολογοῦντες 1 speaking evil Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about”
|
||
ACT 19 9 xsm6 ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου 1 in the lecture hall of Tyrannus Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”
|
||
ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Here, **all** is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 19 11 abcy οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Alternate translation: “unusual”
|
||
ACT 19 12 cb6w αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to those who were sick.
|
||
ACT 19 12 m3kl καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”
|
||
ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
|
||
ACT 19 12 aks4 σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs The **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face.
|
||
ACT 19 12 xs31 σιμικίνθια 1 aprons The **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers.
|
||
ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This refers to **sick** people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 nl3a ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy”
|
||
ACT 19 13 he2x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
|
||
ACT 19 13 fgq4 ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.
|
||
ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 13 d59p τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει 1 by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims **Jesus** was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
|
||
ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”
|
||
ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
|
||
ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them Here, **them** refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md).
|
||
ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
|
||
ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name Here, **the name** stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books”
|
||
ACT 19 19 m6nf ἐνώπιον πάντων 1 before everyone Alternate translation: “in front of everyone”
|
||
ACT 19 19 upz3 τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν 1 the value of them Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
|
||
ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||
ACT 19 20 tj8t writing-endofstory 0 This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
|
||
ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
|
||
ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he”
|
||
ACT 19 21 fgq5 ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he determined in the Spirit This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
|
||
ACT 19 21 brb7 Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md).
|
||
ACT 19 21 rdz4 δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome”
|
||
ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 he himself stayed in Asia for a time It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
|
||
ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke uses the negative **no small** to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md).
|
||
ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 This verse introduces background information about **Demetrius**. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius The use of the words **a certain** introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 nwt7 ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.
|
||
ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke uses the negative **not a little** to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An **occupation** is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”
|
||
ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that”
|
||
ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Here the word **hands** can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 r1w2 figs-activepassive τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν 1 is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 bqt4 μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς 1 And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.
|
||
ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 28 t4lm ἔκραζον 1 Here **they** refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)).
|
||
ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, **anger** is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 28 lcx8 ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly”
|
||
ACT 19 28 ii1u 0 General Information: Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.
|
||
ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 nt7y ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and they rushed together This was a mob or near riot situation.
|
||
ACT 19 29 ej3q εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
|
||
ACT 19 29 hjc8 Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου 1 Paul’s … travel companions These were men who had been with Paul.
|
||
ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 31 z7ww τὸ θέατρον 1 the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated **theater** in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md).
|
||
ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 j1mi figs-explicit κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 tlq7 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to give a defense It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”
|
||
ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων 1 there was one voice from all of them The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with **one voice**. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
|
||
ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **town clerk** was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town.
|
||
ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-litotes ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The town clerk uses **not** to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the **temple** of **Artemis**.
|
||
ACT 19 35 afd1 τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
|
||
ACT 19 36 r8cf ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων 1 So these things are undeniable Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true”
|
||
ACT 19 36 xj2n μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”
|
||
ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash To be **rash** is to act without careful thought.
|
||
ACT 19 37 s8a9 τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The words **these men** refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)).
|
||
ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
|
||
ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 g8tp ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”
|
||
ACT 19 39 hxh3 εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss”
|
||
ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
|
||
ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Race<br><br>Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])<br><br>### “Compelled by the Spirit”<br><br>Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
|
||
ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
|
||
ACT 20 1 y5cq μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον 1 After the uproar had ended Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot”
|
||
ACT 20 1 hr32 ἀσπασάμενος 1 and said farewell Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye”
|
||
ACT 20 2 edb8 παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ 1 had exhorted them with many words Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers”
|
||
ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 cit9 figs-activepassive γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 a plot was formed against him by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 m7na μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 as he was about to sail for Syria Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
|
||
ACT 20 4 c9et συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And accompanying him Alternate translation: “And traveling with him”
|
||
ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 4 w8j6 Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Ἀρίσταρχος…Σεκοῦνδος…Γάϊος…Τιμόθεος…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md).
|
||
ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς 1 All instances of **us** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 5 kv8t οὗτοι…προσελθόντες 1 they had gone before us Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us”
|
||
ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas **Troas** is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 6 vmj6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν 1 All instances of **we** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 6 l5dr τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:3](../12/03.md).
|
||
ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md))
|
||
ACT 20 7 mbr8 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
|
||
ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 j888 παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak”
|
||
ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This **upper room** may have been the third floor of the house.
|
||
ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it.
|
||
ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-metaphor καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ 1 was falling into a deep sleep This speaks about **sleep** as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 abcz κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep The young man fell asleep, not Paul.
|
||
ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was **dead**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story The **third story** refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”
|
||
ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
|
||
ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 11 t88c οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν 1 In this way, he left Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away”
|
||
ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Here, **the boy** refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave.
|
||
ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke uses the negative **not moderately** to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos **Assos** is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-rpronouns ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν Here, **himself** is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 p8y7 πεζεύειν 1 to go on foot Alternate translation: “to walk”
|
||
ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene **Mitylene** is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios **Chios** is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 jyr7 παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον 1 we landed at Samos Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos”
|
||
ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos **Samos** is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 16 p272 translate-names κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus Paul sailed south past the port city of **Ephesus**, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 17 nw52 μετεκαλέσατο 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 20 17 v9al 0 Connecting Statement: Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
|
||
ACT 20 17 l9aj translate-names τῆς Μιλήτου 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 18 b6li figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Here, **yourselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Here, **foot** stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here **tears** stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **trials**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
|
||
ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 20 nu7h ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you”
|
||
ACT 20 20 kut9 κατ’ οἴκους 1 according to houses Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home”
|
||
ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 ty3b ἐγὼ 1 Here the word **I** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem”
|
||
ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 chains and sufferings await me Here, **chains** refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace”
|
||
ACT 20 25 kj9c καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα 1 And now, behold, I know Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know”
|
||
ACT 20 25 z4ng ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες 1 I know that you all Alternate translation: “I know that all of you”
|
||
ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Here, **blood** stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here **all** refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you Paul uses the negative **not hold back** to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Here, **blood** stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were **wolves** that eat the sheep of the **flock**. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
|
||
ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 pvt6 μνημονεύοντες ὅτι 1 Remembering that Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”
|
||
ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-hyperbole τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul did not teach them continuously **for three years**, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 hs1m οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not stop**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn”
|
||
ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Here, **tears** refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 vnb2 παρατίθεμαι 1 I am entrusting To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something.
|
||
ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 to give you the inheritance This speaks about the **word of his grace** as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”
|
||
ACT 20 33 ipq5 ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing Here, **clothing** is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
|
||
ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know The word **yourselves** is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-synecdoche ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who The word **hands** here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 wn8j κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need”
|
||
ACT 20 35 p3n8 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 those who are weak You can state the nominal adjective **weak** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 dpu1 ἀσθενούντων 1 weak Alternate translation: “sick”
|
||
ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Here, **words** refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 e396 μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 It is more blessed to give than to receive This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
|
||
ACT 20 36 q6bs 0 Connecting Statement: Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
|
||
ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him”
|
||
ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
|
||
ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.<br><br>The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “They are all determined to keep the law”<br><br>The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.<br><br>### Nazarite vow<br><br>The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).<br><br>### Gentiles in the temple<br><br>The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
|
||
ACT 21 1 i6f8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
|
||
ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 zz5h εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ 1 having run a straight course, we came to Cos Alternate translation: “we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”
|
||
ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos **Cos** is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 p6ss translate-names Ῥόδον 1 Rhodes **Rhodes** is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara **Patara** is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-metonymy καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 And when we found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Here, **a ship crossing over** stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 2 vbd3 πλοῖον διαπερῶν 1 a ship crossing over Here, **crossing** does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”
|
||
ACT 21 3 er3r figs-exclusive ἐπλέομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 3 vkr2 καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 leaving it behind on the left The **left** is the “port” side of a boat. Alternate translation: “passed the island on our left”
|
||
ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-metonymy ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was to unload its cargo there Here, **ship** stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 4 y35m οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Through the Spirit they kept saying to Paul Alternate translation: “These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him”
|
||
ACT 21 5 fe1u πάντων 1 Here the word **they** refers to the believers from Tyre.
|
||
ACT 21 5 a5wj ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when our days to supply happened Alternate translation: “when we had finished taking supplies onto the ship”
|
||
ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 21 6 ja1x ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους 1 we said farewell to each other Alternate translation: “we said goodbye to one another”
|
||
ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…κατηντήσαμεν…ἐμείναμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais **Ptolemais** was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 7 ff1s τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”
|
||
ACT 21 8 kt6u Καισάρειαν 1 Connecting Statement: This begins Paul’s time in **Caesarea**.
|
||
ACT 21 8 ay52 ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Here, **the seven** refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in [Acts 6:5](../06/05.md).
|
||
ACT 21 8 vi48 εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 evangelist An **evangelist** is a person who tells people the good news about Jesus.
|
||
ACT 21 9 rcf4 τούτῳ 1 this man Alternate translation: “Philip”
|
||
ACT 21 9 cv8b writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 21 9 r1i1 θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι 1 four virgin daughters who prophesy Alternate translation: “four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God”
|
||
ACT 21 10 fe6s figs-exclusive ἐπιμενόντων 1 Here the word **we** refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 10 n3i8 writing-participants τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 a certain prophet named Agabus This introduces **Agabus** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 21 10 f9cb translate-names Ἅγαβος 1 Agabus **Agabus** was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 n2r0 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here the word **us** refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 i8t2 ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου 1 taken Paul’s belt Alternate translation: “removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”
|
||
ACT 21 11 nq2y figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν. 1 Thus says the Holy Spirit, ‘So the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 zvw8 παραδώσουσιν 1 they will hand him over Alternate translation: “they will deliver him”
|
||
ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles The word **hands** here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles This stands for the authorities among **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 12 fvh4 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμεῖς 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a **heart** being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 q35x figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 for the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 hwc5 figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 he would not be persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 zl98 figs-ellipsis μὴ πειθομένου 1 would not be persuaded You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “would not be persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 as1i figs-activepassive τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω 1 Let the will of the Lord happen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 15 p5fm figs-exclusive ἀνεβαίνομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 16 k9kr παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay The disciples from Caesarea knew **Mnason** and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
|
||
ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason … from Cyprus **Mnason** is a man from the island of **Cyprus**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 16 c7r2 τινι…ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 an early disciple This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
|
||
ACT 21 17 wz34 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 21 17 d3gj figs-gendernotations ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 the brothers welcomed us Here, **the brothers** refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 21 19 bx9e ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον 1 he reported according to each thing Alternate translation: “he gave a detailed account of everything”
|
||
ACT 21 20 zks9 0 Connecting Statement: The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
|
||
ACT 21 20 a1hk οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ 1 when they heard it … they glorified … and said to him Here each instance of the word **they** refers to James and the elders. The word **him** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 21 20 xki4 ἀδελφέ 1 brother Here, **brother** means “fellow believer.”
|
||
ACT 21 20 c5pu ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are The word **they** refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
|
||
ACT 21 21 pyg8 figs-explicit κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 And they have been told about you, that you teach apostasy from Moses to all the Jews who are among the Gentiles, telling them not to circumcise their children, nor to walk in the customs Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of **Moses**. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 e5s4 figs-activepassive κατηχήθησαν 1 they have been told If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told the Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses Here, **Moses** stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “rebellion against the Law of Moses” or “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs To obey **the customs** is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could **walk** along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 u56t τοῖς ἔθεσιν 1 in the customs Alternate translation: “do the things that Jews normally do”
|
||
ACT 21 23 b28b figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to James and the elders ([Acts 21:18](../21/18.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 23 b22r ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 four men with us having a vow from themselves This was the kind of **vow** where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. Alternate translation: “four men who have made a promise to God”
|
||
ACT 21 24 km4w figs-explicit τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Having taken these men, be purified with them They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 c3ap figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 pay the expenses for them The **expenses** would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. Alternate translation: “pay for what they will need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 abq6 translate-symaction ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 they will shave their heads This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 what they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 sv6i figs-metaphor στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 you yourself walk in and obey the law This speaks of obeying the law as if **the law** were a path and people can **walk** along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 c4kl figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here the word **we** refers to James and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 a35u figs-explicit φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, and from blood, and from what is strangled All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to **idols**, meat with **blood** still in it, and meat from a **strangled** animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in [Acts 15:20](../15/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-activepassive φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-activepassive πνικτὸν 1 from what is strangled If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was **strangled** were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 cr14 παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 having taken the men These are the four **men** who had made a vow.
|
||
ACT 21 26 s8z9 σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified with them Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
|
||
ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-synecdoche εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 went into the temple They did not go **into the temple** itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 pvy3 τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 of the days of purification This is a separate **purification** process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
|
||
ACT 21 26 gc23 figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη…ἡ προσφορά 1 until the offering which was offered If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 p4gi 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.
|
||
ACT 21 27 j9zm αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 the seven days These are **the seven days** for purification.
|
||
ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Paul was not **in the temple** itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 u942 figs-metaphor συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 stirred up the whole crowd Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they **stirred up** the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 mks6 figs-idiom ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid their hands on him Here, **laid their hands on** means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated **laid hands on** in [Acts 5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “seized Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 sfg3 τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 the people, and the law, and this place Alternate translation: “the people of Israel, and the law of Moses, and the temple”
|
||
ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 And besides, he has both brought Greeks into the temple Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 29 t2z7 writing-background ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος 1 For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian with him in the city, whom they thought that Paul brought into the temple This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 21 29 h1uu Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus **Trophimus** was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in [Acts 20:4](../20/04.md).
|
||
ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 The word **city** represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And the people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 And the whole city was stirred up The word **whole** here is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 x2sx ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου 1 having laid hold of Paul Alternate translation: “having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul”
|
||
ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were immediately shut They **shut** **the doors** so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. Alternate translation: “the temple doors were immediately shut to protect the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 d6vt figs-metonymy ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Here, **report** refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 hu5r ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 a report came up to the commander The phrase **came up to** is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
|
||
ACT 21 31 p85a τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander A Roman **commander** was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
|
||
ACT 21 31 u65r figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was stirred up The word **Jerusalem** here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 zgas figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The word **all** is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 32 j81t κατέδραμεν 1 The word **he** refers to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in [Acts 21:31](../21/31.md).
|
||
ACT 21 32 dgz5 κατέδραμεν 1 ran down From the fortress, there are stairs going **down** into the court.
|
||
ACT 21 32 e4rj τὸν χιλίαρχον 1 the commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
|
||
ACT 21 33 w28u ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ 1 laid hold of him Alternate translation: “took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”
|
||
ACT 21 33 zi4l figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι 1 commanded him to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 xd9w ἁλύσεσι δυσί 1 with two chains This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
|
||
ACT 21 33 y6zw figs-quotations ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς 1 he asked who he is and what it is that he had done. You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 fi22 ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη 1 he asked who he is The commander is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
|
||
ACT 21 34 k35e αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν 1 he The first instance of **he** refers to the commander, and the second **he** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 21 34 qcc6 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanded that he be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 34 w2qj εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 into the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court.
|
||
ACT 21 35 h9n7 figs-activepassive ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 But when he came to the steps, he had to be carried If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers had to carry him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 36 kax6 figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 Away with him The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 And as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 37 qp63 τὴν παρεμβολὴν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md).
|
||
ACT 21 37 inl1 τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers.
|
||
ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness? The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 nxs6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος 1 Are you not then the Egyptian Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 tqh6 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας 1 the 4,000 men Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 p2ym τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the ‘Assassins’ This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.
|
||
ACT 21 39 ys84 δέομαι…σου 1 I ask you Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you”
|
||
ACT 21 39 a139 ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me Alternate translation: “please allow me” or “please permit me”
|
||
ACT 21 40 qp2q figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had given him permission If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **permission**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 40 a4y2 ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν 1 Paul, standing on the steps The word **steps** here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
|
||
ACT 21 40 rk1y figs-explicit κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people It can be stated explicitly why Paul **motioned with his hand**. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 40 xj6i πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης 1 And when there was a deep silence Alternate translation: “And when the people were completely silent”
|
||
ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “In the Hebrew language”<br><br>Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
|
||
ACT 22 1 a8ir 0 Connecting Statement: Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 22 1 xe46 ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
|
||
ACT 22 1 pe8t ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 listen to my defense to you now Alternate translation: “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
|
||
ACT 22 2 kq95 writing-background 0 General Information: This verse gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 22 2 b4sk τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ 1 in the Hebrew language The **Hebrew language** was the language of the Jews.
|
||
ACT 22 3 g311 figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ 1 but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 d4dx figs-metonymy παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ 1 at the feet of Gamaliel Here, **feet** stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 b1dq Γαμαλιήλ 1 of Gamaliel **Gamaliel** was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in [Acts 5:34](../05/34.md).
|
||
ACT 22 3 iz4g figs-activepassive πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου 1 instructed according to the strict ways of the law of our fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 lqk7 τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου 1 of the law of our fathers This refers to **the law** that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of our ancestors”
|
||
ACT 22 3 a8d6 ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 being zealous for God Alternate translation: “I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”
|
||
ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today”
|
||
ACT 22 4 jy3z figs-metonymy ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα 1 I persecuted this Way Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 4 bk4c ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way The term **this Way** was used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated **the Way** in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md).
|
||
ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι θανάτου 1 as far as death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **death**, you could express the same idea with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 4 zd2r δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας 1 binding and delivering to prison both men and women Alternate translation: “tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”
|
||
ACT 22 5 v2km μαρτυρεῖ 1 testifies Alternate translation: “can testify” or “can tell you”
|
||
ACT 22 5 i45u παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος 1 from whom also having received letters Alternate translation: “who also gave me letters”
|
||
ACT 22 5 in72 πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν 1 for the brothers in Damascus Here, **brothers** refers to “fellow Jews.”
|
||
ACT 22 5 y82b ἄξων…τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to bring back in bonds to Jerusalem those who were there Alternate translation: “to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”
|
||
ACT 22 5 ht9f figs-activepassive ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν 1 in order that they might be punished If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 6 pe9s 0 Connecting Statement: Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
|
||
ACT 22 6 w4l7 ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 It happened to me that This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
|
||
ACT 22 7 d6nd figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 heard a voice saying to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 9 h95h figs-synecdoche τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι 1 they did not understand the voice of the one who was speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται 1 and there you will be told If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 11 n1kb οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 I could not see because of the glory of that light Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”
|
||
ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 11 n2n1 figs-synecdoche χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus Here, **hands** stands for those leading Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 12 a17q writing-participants Ἁνανίας…τις 1 The words **a certain Ananias** are used to introduce Ananias as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 22 12 h5bh translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias Though this is not the same **Ananias** who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md), you may translate it the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 22 12 z1g3 ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον 1 a devout man according to the law Ananias was very serious about following God’s **law**.
|
||
ACT 22 12 e7uw figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων 1 being testified to by all the Jews who lived there If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having a good reputation among all the Jews who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 un4g Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 Saul, brother Here, **brother** is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “Saul, my friend”
|
||
ACT 22 13 x3kc figs-idiom ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up This phrase is an idiom that means “receive your sight.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 that very hour This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “at that instant” or “instantly” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 x4s0 figs-idiom κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν 1 And … I looked up to him This phrase is an idiom that means he received his sight. Alternate translation: “And … I was able to see him” or “And … I saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 v2i7 ὁ…εἶπεν 1 The word**he** refers to Ananias ([Acts 22:12](../22/12.md)).
|
||
ACT 22 14 k3ck 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 22 14 k417 τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 his will Alternate translation: “what God is planning and will cause to happen”
|
||
ACT 22 14 dg8q figs-synecdoche ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 to hear the voice from his own mouth Both **voice** and **mouth** refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Here, **men** means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 bhg9 νῦν 1 Now Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
|
||
ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you waiting? This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 wash away your sins As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 g5dq ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 having called on his name Here, **name** refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”
|
||
ACT 22 17 znq6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
|
||
ACT 22 17 its2 ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 And it happened to me that This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
|
||
ACT 22 17 yr9l γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει 1 I fell into a trance Alternate translation: “I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision”
|
||
ACT 22 18 jy2c ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι 1 I saw him saying to me Alternate translation: “I saw Jesus as he said to me”
|
||
ACT 22 18 qul6 οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 they will not accept your testimony about me Alternate translation: “those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”
|
||
ACT 22 19 q5cl αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 Here the words **they themselves** refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 22 19 im4n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know The word **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 19 da1e κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 according to the synagogues Paul went to the **synagogues** to find Jews who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue”
|
||
ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Here, **blood** stands for Stephen’s life. To **spill blood** means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 22 fj9x αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν 1 Here both instances of the words **him** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 22 22 ta8z αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The phrase **from the earth** adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”
|
||
ACT 22 23 ylr7 κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν 1 And as they were shouting The phrase **as they were** is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
|
||
ACT 22 23 b6a7 translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα 1 throwing off their outer garments, and throwing dust into the air These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 x7zv χιλίαρχος 1 commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
|
||
ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanded him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md).
|
||
ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-explicit εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by flogging The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. Alternate translation: “ordering that Paul be whipped to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 25 ar63 προέτειναν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the soldiers.
|
||
ACT 22 25 st4k τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν 1 for the whip The **whip** was made from strips of leather or animal hide.
|
||
ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 27 pe31 αὐτῷ…ὁ 1 Here the words **him** and **he** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 22 27 e69y figs-go προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος 1 having come, the commander Here, **come** can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 dr2w ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome”
|
||
ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **citizenship**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 rly1 ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I, however, was indeed born as one If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are **born**. Paul’s father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!”
|
||
ACT 22 29 ii8p οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν 1 those who were about to examine Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question”
|
||
ACT 22 30 g33i κατηγορεῖται…ἔλυσεν αὐτόν…ἔστησεν 1 Here the first occurrence of the word **he** refers to Paul, and the second and third occurrences refer to the chief captain. Both occurrences of the word **him** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 22 30 kx58 ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him Alternate translation: “the commander ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds”
|
||
ACT 22 30 c5ia καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον 1 having brought down Paul From the fortress, there is a stairway going **down** to the temple courts.
|
||
ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Resurrection of the dead<br><br>The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])<br><br>### “Called a curse”<br><br>Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Whitewash<br><br>This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 1 z2sq 0 Connecting Statement: Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members ([Acts 22:30](../22/30.md)).
|
||
ACT 23 1 jru4 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jews.”
|
||
ACT 23 1 nn2q ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας 1 I have lived as a citizen before God in all good conscience until this day Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man”
|
||
ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall This refers to a **wall** that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for **strike** as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 veqe ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 Paul quotes from the writings of Moses.
|
||
ACT 23 6 pbe1 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jews.”
|
||
ACT 23 6 as3f υἱὸς Φαρισαίων 1 a son of Pharisees Here, **son** means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”
|
||
ACT 23 6 ys5k figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι 1 I am being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 iz18 figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the hope and resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the idea as “come back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I have confidence that the dead will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the nominal adjective **dead**, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 23 7 abs3 ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος 1 the crowd was divided Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”
|
||
ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ λέγουσιν μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα; Φαρισαῖοι δὲ ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees This is background information about the **Sadducees** and **Pharisees**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 23 9 eaf1 ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη 1 So a large uproar occurred The word **so** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another”
|
||
ACT 23 9 ayr8 figs-hypo εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel? The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 dr1d figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως 1 And when a great argument happened The phrase **a great argument** can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 s65i χιλίαρχος 1 commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
|
||
ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 that Paul would be torn to pieces by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 tqhu figs-hyperbole διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 The phrase **be torn to pieces** might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 man3 ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν 1 to seize him by force Alternate translation: “to use physical force to take him away”
|
||
ACT 23 10 ap3c εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 into the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md).
|
||
ACT 23 11 i9w5 τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 the following night This means the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night”
|
||
ACT 23 11 r4q4 figs-ellipsis εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι 1 to testify in Rome The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 12 fm3y 0 Connecting Statement: While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
|
||
ACT 23 12 klb4 ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν 1 having formed a conspiracy They formed this **conspiracy** for the purpose of killing Paul. Alternate translation: “having organized a group with a shared purpose”
|
||
ACT 23 12 g3sj figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 cursed themselves It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 13 f1u2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα οἱ 1 40 who Alternate translation: “forty men who had become part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 23 13 u5s5 οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι 1 who had formed this conspiracy Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”
|
||
ACT 23 14 zb6w οἵτινες 1 Here the word **They** refers to the forty Jews in [Acts 23:13](../23/13.md).
|
||
ACT 23 14 ur73 figs-metaphor ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον 1 We have cursed ourselves with a curse, to eat nothing until we have killed Paul To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the **curse** were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 15 tuao figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμᾶς…μέλλοντας 1 All instances of **you** are plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **we** refers to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 23 15 w418 νῦν οὖν 1 Now, therefore Alternate translation: “Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”
|
||
ACT 23 15 q9e6 νῦν 1 Now Here, **Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
|
||
ACT 23 15 q9mb καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 he will bring him down to you Alternate translation: “the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”
|
||
ACT 23 15 m133 ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 as if you are going to examine more seriously the things concerning him Alternate translation: “as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”
|
||
ACT 23 16 w6fe ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Alternate translation: “the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”
|
||
ACT 23 16 pj5h ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 having heard of the ambush Alternate translation: “hearing that they were ready to ambush Paul” or “finding out that they were waiting to kill Paul”
|
||
ACT 23 16 a5hx τὴν παρεμβολὴν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md).
|
||
ACT 23 17 d7cy ἔχει…αὐτῷ 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul’s nephew. The word **him** refers to the chief captain.
|
||
ACT 23 18 abd0 ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 So having taken him, he brought him Alternate translation: “So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”
|
||
ACT 23 18 lzf3 ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με 1 The prisoner, Paul, having summoned me Alternate translation: “The prisoner named Paul after he asked me to come talk with him”
|
||
ACT 23 18 ju2b τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν 1 this young man Since the chief captain calls him a **young man**, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
|
||
ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο 1 The Jews have agreed Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **Jews**, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 20 wp5d Παῦλον καταγάγῃς 1 you might bring Paul down Alternate translation: “you would bring Paul down from the fortress”
|
||
ACT 23 20 fev5 ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ. 1 as if they were going to inquire something more concerning him Alternate translation: “pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done”
|
||
ACT 23 21 i2k9 ἐνεδρεύουσιν…αὐτὸν 1 lie in wait for him Alternate translation: “are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul”
|
||
ACT 23 21 r695 οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν 1 who have cursed themselves neither to eat nor to drink until they have killed him Alternate translation: “who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”
|
||
ACT 23 23 wk7k προσκαλεσάμενός 1 having summoned Alternate translation: “having called to himself”
|
||
ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 23 23 kg8s τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night This was about 9:00 PM.
|
||
ACT 23 24 av3h Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα 1 **Felix**, who resided at Caesarea, was the Roman **governor** of the area.
|
||
ACT 23 25 vg8x 0 General Information: The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.
|
||
ACT 23 26 vg8y translate-names Κλαύδιος Λυσίας…Φήλικι 1 **Claudius Lysias** is the name of the chief captain. Governor **Felix** was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 zf93 figs-123person Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix, greetings This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 yk79 figs-ellipsis Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 u2ih τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 to the most excellent Governor Felix Alternate translation: “to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”
|
||
ACT 23 27 zr7l figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 This man, having been seized the Jews Here, **the Jews** means “some of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “This man was seized by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 yy0e figs-activepassive τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 ha13 figs-activepassive μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 about to be killed by them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 v78t ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην 1 having come with detachment of soldiers, I rescued Alternate translation: “I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him”
|
||
ACT 23 28 lb1a κατήγαγον 1 Here the word **I** refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.
|
||
ACT 23 28 lb1b ἐνεκάλουν αὐτῷ 1 The word **they** refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.
|
||
ACT 23 29 zt4f figs-activepassive ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν 1 I learned that he was being accused concerning questions of their own law If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-abstractnouns μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 but there was no accusation worthy of death or imprisonment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **accusation**, **death**, and **imprisonment**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 30 lb1c figs-you σέ 1 The word **you** is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 And when a plot was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 30 pmq7 0 Connecting Statement: The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
|
||
ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 **Antipatris** was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 31 s9rf 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
|
||
ACT 23 31 ny4k οἱ…οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 So the soldiers, according to what had been commanded to them The word **So** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the commander’s ordering the soldiers to escort Paul.
|
||
ACT 23 31 ptv4 ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς 1 having taken Paul, brought him by night Here, **brought** can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “they got Paul and took him at night”
|
||
ACT 23 32 abd1 ὑπέστρεψαν 1 having allowed … they returned Here, **they** refers to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
|
||
ACT 23 33 abx1 οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες 1 When they had entered Here, **they** refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
|
||
ACT 23 34 u44w ἀναγνοὺς…ἐστὶν…ἀπὸ 1 Here the first **he** refers to Governor Felix, and the second and third occurrences of **he** refer to Paul.
|
||
ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 had asked what province he was from You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 35 dwv2 figs-quotations ἔφη 1 he said This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 35 uji1 διακούσομαί σου 1 I will hear you fully Alternate translation: “I will listen to all you have to say”
|
||
ACT 23 35 mga2 κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 having commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him”
|
||
ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Respect<br><br>Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Governmental leaders<br><br>The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 bc8k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
|
||
ACT 24 1 e8rp μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας 1 And after five days Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”
|
||
ACT 24 1 n9gu translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). See how you translated this in [Acts 23:1](../23/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 f3vx ῥήτορος 1 an orator Alternate translation: Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. “a lawyer”
|
||
ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Tertullus **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 q7wj κατέβη 1 went there Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was”
|
||
ACT 24 1 nq9x τῷ ἡγεμόνι 1 to the governor Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”
|
||
ACT 24 1 zm5e ἐνεφάνισαν τῷ ἡγεμόνι κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 appeared … against Paul Alternate translation: “came there to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law”
|
||
ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες 1 We have obtained great peace Here, **we** refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 qw1r figs-you σοῦ…σῆς 1 Here the words **you** and **your** refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 sv8c καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας 1 and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation”
|
||
ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 3 q3fj κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix **Felix** was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 23:25](../23/25.md). Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor”
|
||
ACT 24 4 tyq8 figs-exclusive μὴ…ἐνκόπτω 1 The word **we** refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 24 4 jww2 ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω 1 However, in order that we may not bother you any longer This could mean: (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”
|
||
ACT 24 4 xfm5 ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ 1 to briefly listen to us in your kindness Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech”
|
||
ACT 24 5 i1qs εὑρόντες…τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν 1 we have found this man to be a troublemaker Alternate translation: “we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble”
|
||
ACT 24 5 k1v1 figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 among all the Jews who are throughout the world The word **all** here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 24 5 zg4a figs-explicit πρωτοστάτην…τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως 1 he is a leader of the sect of the Nazarenes The phrase **the sect of the Nazarenes** is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “he leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 5 n6zb αἱρέσεως 1 of sect A **sect** is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
|
||
ACT 24 8 ujn8 figs-you δυνήσῃ αὐτὸς 1 Here the word **you** is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 24 8 e26a ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ 1 to learn of what we are accusing him Alternate translation: “to learn that we are bringing very serious charges against him” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things of which we are accusing him”
|
||
ACT 24 8 xkr4 0 Connecting Statement: Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
|
||
ACT 24 9 rq5f figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders who were at Paul’s trial. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 24 10 ict8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
|
||
ACT 24 10 s92a νεύσαντος…τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 and the governor motioned Alternate translation: “and the governor gestured”
|
||
ACT 24 10 uu7a figs-metonymy κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 a judge to this nation Here, **this nation** refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 24 10 sr5t εὐθύμως…ἀπολογοῦμαι 1 I … make my defense Alternate translation: “I gladly explain my situation”
|
||
ACT 24 12 my1c εὗρόν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
|
||
ACT 24 12 wbf6 ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου 1 nor causing a rebellion of the crowd Alternate translation: “and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome”
|
||
ACT 24 14 c5xa ὁμολογῶ…τοῦτό σοι 1 I confess this to you Alternate translation: “I acknowledge this to you”
|
||
ACT 24 14 k79p ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 that according to the Way The phrase **the Way** was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.
|
||
ACT 24 14 rqu3 λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν 1 they call a sect A **sect** is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated **sect** in [Acts 24:5](../24/05.md).
|
||
ACT 24 14 cg73 οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ 1 in that way I serve the God of our fathers Paul uses the phrase **in that way** to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a **sect** or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.
|
||
ACT 24 15 nv5a καὶ αὐτοὶ 1 also these men Here, **these men** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men”
|
||
ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 15 x1yd figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 of both the righteous and the unrighteous These nominal adjectives refer to **righteous** people and **unrighteous** people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 24 16 sfw4 αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός 1 I myself always strive Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best”
|
||
ACT 24 16 kcg8 figs-metonymy ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 to have a blameless conscience before God Here, **conscience** refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 24 16 va3b πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 before God Alternate translation: “in the presence of God”
|
||
ACT 24 17 p92m δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
|
||
ACT 24 17 py9v δι’ ἐτῶν…πλειόνων 1 after many years Alternate translation: “after many years away from Jerusalem”
|
||
ACT 24 17 ryk6 figs-go ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς 1 I came to bring alms to my nation, and offerings Here, **I came** can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 24 18 pk2m ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 having been cleansed in the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”
|
||
ACT 24 18 x6iy figs-explicit οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου 1 not with a crowd nor with an uproar You can state this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 20 ag5d αὐτοὶ 1 these Here, **these** refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.
|
||
ACT 24 20 hnt9 αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα 1 let … say what wrong they found Alternate translation: “let these men prove what I did wrong”
|
||
ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the same idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 21 d2lm figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν 1 I am being judged before you today If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 22 w1tn translate-names ὁ Φῆλιξ 1 **Felix** is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 22 a87f τῆς Ὁδοῦ 1 the Way Here, **the Way** is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md).
|
||
ACT 24 22 k1f7 Λυσίας 1 Lysias **Lysias** is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md).
|
||
ACT 24 22 z5f9 καταβῇ 1 may come down Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming **down** from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “may come down from Jerusalem”
|
||
ACT 24 22 ldi8 διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 I will decide the things concerning you Alternate translation: “I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”
|
||
ACT 24 23 sxy2 ἔχειν…ἄνεσιν 1 to have rest Alternate translation: “to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”
|
||
ACT 24 24 wus4 μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς 1 But after some days Alternate translation: “But after several days”
|
||
ACT 24 24 qy9y translate-names Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ ἰδίᾳ γυναικὶ 1 Drusilla his own wife **Drusilla** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 24 xmq5 figs-explicit οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ 1 who was a Jewess A **Jewess** refers to a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 25 b8v1 ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ 1 Felix, having became frightened Felix may have been **frightened** because he felt conviction of his sins.
|
||
ACT 24 25 p8yi τὸ νῦν ἔχον 1 Go away for now Alternate translation: “Leave me for a while”
|
||
ACT 24 26 h4v7 χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 money will be given to him by Paul Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.
|
||
ACT 24 26 n45p διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ 1 and therefore often summoning him, he was speaking to him Alternate translation: “and so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”
|
||
ACT 24 27 ur2y translate-names ἔλαβεν διάδοχον ὁ Φῆλιξ Πόρκιον Φῆστον 1 Felix received a successor—Porcius Festus **Porcius Festus** was the new roman governor who succeeded **Felix**. Alternate translation: “Porcius Festus replaced Felix as the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 p59c figs-synecdoche θέλων…χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 wanted to gain favor with the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 gln6 ὁ Φῆλιξ…κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον 2 Felix left Paul imprisoned Alternate translation: “Felix kept Paul in prison”
|
||
ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Favor<br><br>This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
|
||
ACT 25 1 c84u Φῆστος 1 **Festus** becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 24:27](../24/27.md).
|
||
ACT 25 1 w8h3 οὖν 1 then The word **then** marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
|
||
ACT 25 1 i7t9 Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 Festus … having arrived in the province This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
|
||
ACT 25 1 zz4l ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
|
||
ACT 25 2 uj5p παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 they begged him Here the word **him** refers to Festus.
|
||
ACT 25 3 w8um χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 a favor against him Here the word **him** refers to Paul.
|
||
ACT 25 3 qz46 ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 that he might summon him to Jerusalem This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to **Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
|
||
ACT 25 3 pg8x ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 to kill him along the way They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 25 4 v5f9 figs-quotations Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea, and that he himself was about to go there in haste. You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 5 a54h οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες 1 He said, “Therefore, the leaders among you, having come down together Alternate translation: “He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”
|
||
ACT 25 5 iz98 εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον 1 If there is something wrong with the man Alternate translation: “If Paul has done anything wrong”
|
||
ACT 25 5 nei6 κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ 1 you should accuse him Alternate translation: “you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
|
||
ACT 25 6 fi27 διατρίψας…καταβὰς…ἐκέλευσεν…ἀχθῆναι 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** and **him** refer to Festus.
|
||
ACT 25 6 s69c καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 he went down to Caesarea Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming **down** from Jerusalem.
|
||
ACT 25 6 qv24 figs-metonymy καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 25 6 j7c5 figs-activepassive τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι 1 Paul to be brought to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 7 v4v8 παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 And when he had come Alternate translation: “And when he came and stood before Festus”
|
||
ACT 25 7 e7g2 figs-metaphor πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες 1 bringing many and serious charges Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 25 8 hc3w figs-synecdoche εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 against the temple Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem **temple**. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 b49x figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 wanting to do a favor for the Jews Here, **the Jews** means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 qe8h εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 to go up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going **up to Jerusalem**.
|
||
ACT 25 9 wi2d figs-activepassive ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 and to be judged there before me about these things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged The **judgment seat** refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 11 el9d figs-hypo εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||
ACT 25 11 m49r Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 Connecting Statement: Paul asks to be taken before **Caesar** for judgment.
|
||
ACT 25 11 ta55 ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι 1 have done anything worthy of death Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
|
||
ACT 25 11 hxr1 εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου 1 But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true”
|
||
ACT 25 11 hr23 οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 no one is able to hand me over to them This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
|
||
ACT 25 11 b1bf Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 I appeal to Caesar Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”
|
||
ACT 25 12 t96z μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 with the council This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as **council** throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
|
||
ACT 25 13 izu8 writing-participants Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 **King Agrippa** and **Bernice** are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 25 13 q0sv translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 **Agrippa** is a man and **Bernice** is a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 25 13 c3gc δὲ 1 Now This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
|
||
ACT 25 13 ukd3 ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον 1 paid their respects to Festus Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus”
|
||
ACT 25 14 ge5h 0 Connecting Statement: Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
|
||
ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 14 z7yw Φήλικος 1 Felix **Felix** was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md).
|
||
ACT 25 15 b6hx figs-metaphor περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν 1 brought charges concerning him To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **judgment**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 16 e4tk figs-metaphor χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον 1 to hand over any man Here, **hand over** represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-idiom πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face Here, **have his accusers face to face** is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
|
||
ACT 25 17 rm5z συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε 1 when they had come together here Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”
|
||
ACT 25 17 efe2 figs-metonymy καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 25 17 hm6g figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 I commanded the man to be brought in If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 19 d1qm τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας 1 their own religion Here, **religion** means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
|
||
ACT 25 20 y9bv figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων 1 and there to be judged concerning these things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 21 ie7x figs-activepassive τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν 1 But when Paul appealed for him to be kept for the decision of the emperor If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 21 ceq2 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 I commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 22 t322 writing-quotations αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **he says** can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 23 y1yj τοῦ Ἀγρίππα καὶ τῆς Βερνίκης 1 Though he ruled over only a few territories, **Agrippa** was the current reigning king in Palestine. **Bernice** was his sister. See how you translated these names in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md).
|
||
ACT 25 23 yw76 μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας 1 with much ceremony Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them”
|
||
ACT 25 23 ldb7 τὸ ἀκροατήριον 1 the hall This **hall** was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
|
||
ACT 25 23 at4t figs-activepassive ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was brought in If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 n8qj figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 all the multitude of the Jews The word **all** is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 yv2q figs-litotes μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 he ought not to live any longer This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 25 25 f6hy αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 but he himself having appealed to the emperor Alternate translation: “but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
|
||
ACT 25 25 g856 τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the emperor The **emperor** was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
|
||
ACT 25 26 fe2n figs-you ὑμῶν…σοῦ 1 Here the first **you** is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in [25:24](../25/24.md). The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 25 26 jcq2 προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα 1 I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
|
||
ACT 25 26 rhy2 ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω 1 so that … I might have something to write Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”
|
||
ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **unreasonable … not**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
|
||
ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))<br><br>Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
|
||
ACT 26 1 b34d 0 Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
|
||
ACT 26 1 gz9f Ἀγρίππας 1 Agrippa **Agrippa** was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md).
|
||
ACT 26 1 wme6 ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 having stretched out his hand Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”
|
||
ACT 26 1 vni8 figs-abstractnouns ἀπελογεῖτο 1 made his defense If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **defense**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 2 ha47 ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον 1 I consider myself blessed Paul said he was **blessed** because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
|
||
ACT 26 2 xhz1 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to make my defense Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”
|
||
ACT 26 2 mdq2 figs-activepassive περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 Concerning all the things of which I am accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 2 cbr3 figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 3 kns2 figs-explicit ζητημάτων 1 their controversies You can make explicit what kinds of **controversies** Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 26 4 x96h ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου 1 among my nation This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
|
||
ACT 26 5 y9a1 τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 the strictest sect of our religion Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
|
||
ACT 26 6 s9kr νῦν 1 Now The word **Now** marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
|
||
ACT 26 6 i9y5 figs-activepassive ἕστηκα κρινόμενος 1 I stand here being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 r42g figs-metaphor ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 because of my hope of the promise that was made to our fathers by God This speaks about a **promise** as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which our 12 tribes hope to attain The phrase **our 12 tribes** stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 apf2 figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which … hope to attain This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον 1 serving night and day The extremes **night** and **day** mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise **the dead** but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 ukk6 νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
|
||
ACT 26 9 hm33 μὲν οὖν 1 Then Paul uses the word **Then** to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
|
||
ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία 1 opposed to the name of Jesus The word **name** here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 10 nys7 figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 when they were being put to death, I cast my vote against them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase **were being put to death** in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 11 rri6 πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 often punishing them This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
|
||
ACT 26 12 us8d ἐν οἷς 1 While doing this Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
|
||
ACT 26 12 h3ic ἐν οἷς 1 While The word **While** is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
|
||
ACT 26 12 ajp6 μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 with authority and a commission Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
|
||
ACT 26 14 sip5 figs-metonymy ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 I heard a voice speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 14 du3t Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
|
||
ACT 26 14 zsi2 figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 It is hard for you to kick against a goad For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or **goad**) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 to open their eyes Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone **to open their eyes**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of **light**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn from … from the power of Satan to God Helping someone to stop obeying **Satan** and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον 1 an inheritance The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were **an inheritance** that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-metaphor τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me”
|
||
ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
|
||
ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not disobedient**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision This refers to what the person in the **vision** told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn to God To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 21 tl6t figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 22 t8f4 μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 to both small and great Here, **small** and **great** are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
|
||
ACT 26 22 f6py οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν 1 nothing other than what You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”
|
||
ACT 26 22 i9ki ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται 1 what both the prophets Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament **prophets**.
|
||
ACT 26 23 pe9h figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός 1 that the Christ is to suffer You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 p9t8 ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 from the resurrection Alternate translation: “to be brought back to life”
|
||
ACT 26 23 sc5f νεκρῶν 1 of the dead The phrase **the dead** refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
|
||
ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 is going to proclaim light To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the **light**. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 24 dvn2 μαίνῃ 1 you are insane Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
|
||
ACT 26 24 tk27 τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 your great learning is turning you to insanity Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”
|
||
ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ 1 I am not insane … but If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not insane**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 25 a6pb κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors”
|
||
ACT 26 26 ed7y figs-123person ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν 1 the king … to him … from him Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 cs7b παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 I am speaking boldly Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”
|
||
ACT 26 26 svn9 figs-activepassive πείθομαι 1 I am persuaded that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ…οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 2 this was not done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind **Agrippa** that Agrippa already believes what **the prophets** said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-metonymy παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 but without these chains Here, **these chains** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 30 k7jh ἥ…Βερνίκη 1 **Bernice** was the sister of King Agrippa ([Acts 25:13](../25/13.md)).
|
||
ACT 26 30 u8vl ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν 1 And then the king got up, and the governor Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
|
||
ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **death**, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 31 dwyb figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 Here, **chains** stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man was able to have been released If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sailing<br><br>People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.<br><br>### Trust<br><br>Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>### Paul breaks bread<br><br>Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
|
||
ACT 27 1 dyf5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
|
||
ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐκρίθη 1 when it was decided If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 yv84 εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 to Italy **Italy** was the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated **Italy** in [Acts 18:2](../18/02.md).
|
||
ACT 27 1 s6ny παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius of the Augustan regiment Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
|
||
ACT 27 1 k52u παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners This could mean: (1) **they** refers to the governor and the king or (2) **they** refers to other Roman officials.
|
||
ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 to a centurion named Julius **Julius** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 **Adramyttium** was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 having boarded a ship … being about to sail Here, **a ship … being about to sail** stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 tol6 figs-exclusive ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν 1 The words **we** and **us** include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 fqy2 πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 a ship from Adramyttium This could mean: (1) a **ship** that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a **ship** that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
|
||
ACT 27 2 f8pf μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 being about to sail Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon”
|
||
ACT 27 2 m3ps ἀνήχθημεν 1 we set sail Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea”
|
||
ACT 27 2 h3uy Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus **Aristarchus** came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md).
|
||
ACT 27 3 r71e figs-exclusive κατήχθημεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 27 3 u6lt φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος 1 Julius having treated Paul kindly See how you translated **Julius** in [Acts 27:1](../27/01.md). Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern”
|
||
ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to go to his friends to receive their care If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **care**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 4 d4hg ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν 1 having put to sea, we sailed under Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under”
|
||
ACT 27 4 mjt8 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus Here, **under Cyprus** means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.
|
||
ACT 27 5 g1t7 Παμφυλίαν 1 Pamphylia **Pamphylia** was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md).
|
||
ACT 27 5 y6m6 figs-explicit κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 we came to Myra of Lycia You can make explicit that they got off the ship in **Myra**. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 5 ni2x translate-names εἰς Μύρρα 1 to Myra **Myra** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 5 uaf4 translate-names τῆς Λυκίας 1 of Lycia **Lycia** was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 6 j4cf figs-explicit εὑρὼν…πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 having found a ship from Alexandria sailing to Italy It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 6 fdq2 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρῖνον 1 from Alexandria **Alexandria** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 zzw1 figs-explicit δὲ…βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι 1 And sailing slowly … and having arrived with difficulty You can make explicit that the reason they were **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 pye5 translate-names κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον 1 near Cnidus **Cnidus** was an ancient settlement located in what today is modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 hhf1 μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου 1 the wind no longer allowing us to go that way Alternate translation: “with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”
|
||
ACT 27 7 b746 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην 1 we sailed along Crete Alternate translation: “we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
|
||
ACT 27 7 mq4n translate-names κατὰ Σαλμώνην 1 opposite Salmone **Salmone** is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 p4ri figs-explicit μόλις…παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν 1 sailing along it with difficulty You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 a64y translate-names Καλοὺς Λιμένας 1 Fair Havens **Fair Havens** was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 n7re translate-names πόλις ἦν Λασαία 1 the city of Lasea **Lasea** was a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 9 ea4l ἱκανοῦ…χρόνου διαγενομένου 1 much time having passed Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
|
||
ACT 27 9 u6x5 ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι 1 the voyage already being dangerous because even the fast had already passed This **fast** took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
|
||
ACT 27 10 p29v θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας…μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν 1 I see that the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss Alternate translation: “if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
|
||
ACT 27 10 nx9c ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν 1 loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives Here, **loss** means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
|
||
ACT 27 10 q9xt οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου 1 not only of the cargo and the ship The word **cargo** refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 11 b1kz figs-activepassive ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις 1 spoken by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 l2n4 figs-activepassive ἀνευθέτου…τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν 1 the harbor being unsuitable for wintering You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 jmi3 λιμένος 1 harbor A **harbor** is a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there.
|
||
ACT 27 12 k2ti translate-names Φοίνικα 1 Phoenix **Phoenix** is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 z1lf figs-metaphor παραχειμάσαι 1 to spend the winter there This speaks about the season of **winter** as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 x6vl βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking toward the southwest and toward the northwest This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
|
||
ACT 27 12 gyd2 κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 toward the southwest and toward the northwest These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. The **southwest** is a little to the left of the setting sun, and **northwest** is a little to the right of the setting sun.
|
||
ACT 27 13 xx67 ἄραντες 1 after they had weighed anchor Here, **weighed anchor** means to pull the anchor out of the water. An **anchor** is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
|
||
ACT 27 14 m2xe μετ’ οὐ πολὺ 1 not long after Alternate translation: “after a little while”
|
||
ACT 27 14 fs4z ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς 1 a violent wind Alternate translation: “a very strong, dangerous wind”
|
||
ACT 27 14 g1ek translate-transliterate ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων 1 called the northeaster The word for **northeaster** in the original language is **Euroclydon**. You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 27 14 tz2k ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς 1 rushed down from it Alternate translation: “came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
|
||
ACT 27 15 fxp1 συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 And having been seized and the ship not being able to face into the wind Alternate translation: “And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
|
||
ACT 27 15 w1hl figs-activepassive ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα 1 having given way, we were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 c4cg νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες 1 sailing under the lee of a certain island Alternate translation: “sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”
|
||
ACT 27 16 aq56 translate-names νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 of a certain island called Cauda This island of **Cauda** was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 h9z2 τῆς σκάφης 1 of the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
|
||
ACT 27 17 v9ag ἣν ἄραντες 1 Having hoisted it up Alternate translation: “When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 17 tx1f βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον 1 they used ropes, binding the ship They tied **ropes** around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
|
||
ACT 27 17 dvv4 translate-names τὴν Σύρτιν 1 Syrtis **Syrtis** is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 l8kl χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος 1 having lowered the sea anchor A **sea anchor** was a sail or other object that would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow down the ship from going where the wind was blowing them.
|
||
ACT 27 17 g7rw figs-activepassive ἐφέροντο 1 they were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 18 fx4m figs-activepassive σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν 1 with us being exceedingly battered by the storm If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 18 nd5h ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο 1 they began the jettisoning of the cargo Here, **they** is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
|
||
ACT 27 18 ny6k ἐκβολὴν 1 the jettisoning of the cargo The word **cargo** refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:10](../27/10.md). Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 19 vm2k αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν 1 they threw overboard the equipment of the ship with their own hands Here, **equipment** refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
|
||
ACT 27 20 if7a μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας 1 But neither sun nor stars appearing for many days They could not see the **sun** and **stars** because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
|
||
ACT 27 20 p2wd χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου 1 no small storm assaulting us Alternate translation: “as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”
|
||
ACT 27 20 mnj5 figs-activepassive λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all remaining hope for us to be saved was taken away If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 21 d1le figs-explicit πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης 1 And after being a long time without food It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 21 zns2 ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 in the midst of them Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people on the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 21 bc1x κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν 1 and to suffer this injury and loss Alternate translation: “and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”
|
||
ACT 27 22 d95r figs-explicit ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 there will be no loss of life among you Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 22 djh4 πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου 1 but only of the ship Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 24 z1j8 figs-metonymy Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 You must stand before Caesar The phrase **stand before Caesar** refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 27 24 s3wv κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 has graciously granted to you all those who are sailing with you Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
|
||
ACT 27 25 r9t8 figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 according to the way it was told to me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 26 vmp6 εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν 1 we must run aground upon some island Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”
|
||
ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο 1 And when the fourteenth night came The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven this way and that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Adriatic Sea The **Adriatic Sea** is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 28 ruj1 βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”
|
||
ACT 27 28 tq53 translate-numbers εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι…εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 they found 20 fathoms A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 27 29 b1qc ἀγκύρας 1 anchors An **anchor** is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:13](../27/13.md).
|
||
ACT 27 29 q4am ἐκ πρύμνης 1 from the stern Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 30 b4wv τὴν σκάφην 1 the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:16](../27/16.md).
|
||
ACT 27 30 rr89 ἐκ πρῴρης 1 from the bow Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **unless … not able**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 27 31 br71 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form **be saved** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 33 q3y8 ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι 1 And up until it was about to become daytime Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise”
|
||
ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν 1 Today is the fourteenth day The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 27 34 j3qx figs-idiom οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 a hair from the head of none of you will perish This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 35 yh7y κλάσας 1 having broken bread Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”
|
||
ACT 27 36 zt9q figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ 1 And they were all encouraged and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 37 ynq3 writing-background ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship This is background information about the number of people on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 27 39 vdk2 κόλπον 1 a bay A **bay** is a large area of water partly surrounded by land, but open to a larger body of water.
|
||
ACT 27 39 r1bx τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they did not recognize the land Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
|
||
ACT 27 40 k66v τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων 1 having cut loose the anchors, they left them Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
|
||
ACT 27 40 ntr9 τῶν πηδαλίων 1 of the rudders These **rudders** were large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering the ship.
|
||
ACT 27 40 cn2w τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the foresail A “sail” was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. A **foresail** is the said at the front of a ship that had more than one sail. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 40 pa1k κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 they headed to the beach Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach”
|
||
ACT 27 41 y22n περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον 1 having come to a place between two seas Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.
|
||
ACT 27 41 cpu5 πρῷρα 1 bow of the ship Alternate translation: “front of the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 41 v35z ἡ…πρύμνα 2 the stern Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”
|
||
ACT 27 42 qul7 τῶν…στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο 1 the plan of the soldiers was Alternate translation: “the soldiers were planning”
|
||
ACT 27 43 s2sz ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος 1 stopped their plan Alternate translation: “kept them from doing what they planned to do”
|
||
ACT 27 43 br8u ἀπορίψαντας 1 having jumped overboard Alternate translation: “having jumped off the ship into the water”
|
||
ACT 27 44 hw7p οὓς…ἐπὶ σανίσιν 1 some on planks Alternate translation: “some on wooden boards”
|
||
ACT 28 intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Letters” and “brothers”<br><br>The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.<br><br>When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “He was a god”<br><br>The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
|
||
ACT 28 1 p1bd figs-exclusive τότε ἐπέγνωμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 28 1 twx8 0 Connecting Statement: After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
|
||
ACT 28 1 j1yf figs-activepassive καὶ διασωθέντες 1 And having been brought safely through If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 1 f8y4 translate-names Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται 1 the island was called Malta **Malta** is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 2 e7w6 οἵ…βάρβαροι 1 the native people Alternate translation: “the local people”
|
||
ACT 28 2 v8yh figs-metaphor παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν 1 offered to us not ordinary kindness Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 2 r7jy figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 not just ordinary kindness This phrase is uses a negative to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 2 z9cp ἅψαντες…πυρὰν 1 having lit a fire Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
|
||
ACT 28 2 itw2 προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 they welcomed us all This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
|
||
ACT 28 3 g4ad ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα 1 a viper, having come out from the heat Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”
|
||
ACT 28 3 xmx4 καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 fastened on to his hand Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
|
||
ACT 28 4 ye7h πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man certainly is a murderer Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
|
||
ACT 28 4 ma1b figs-explicit ἡ δίκη 1 justice The word **justice** refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 5 q5i3 ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ 1 shaking off the snake into the fire Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
|
||
ACT 28 5 asr8 ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν 1 suffered no harm Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all”
|
||
ACT 28 6 m11i πίμπρασθαι 1 to become inflamed This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
|
||
ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **nothing unusual**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 having changed their minds To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 d1rj ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
|
||
ACT 28 7 f4sa figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἐξένισεν 1 Here both instance of the word **us** refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 28 7 r95r ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον 1 Now in the area near that same place **Now** is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
|
||
ACT 28 7 wx6t τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου 1 of the most important man of the island This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
|
||
ACT 28 7 wh2d translate-names ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ 1 named Publius **Publius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 8 g12t writing-background ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι 1 And it happened that the father of Publius was lying sick, having been afflicted with fever and dysentery This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 28 8 m154 figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 having been afflicted with fever and dysentery If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 8 fr46 δυσεντερίῳ 1 dysentery “Dysentery” is an infectious intestinal disease.
|
||
ACT 28 8 pwk5 ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ 1 having placed his hands on him Alternate translation: “having touched him with his hands”
|
||
ACT 28 9 yk6u figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 were being healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 10 ydg4 πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 honored us with many honors Probably they **honored** Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
|
||
ACT 28 11 qi6e παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ 1 that had wintered at the island Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
|
||
ACT 28 11 cm2t ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ 1 in an Alexandrian ship This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
|
||
ACT 28 11 jc5t figs-explicit Διοσκούροις 1 The **Heavenly Twins** refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 12 w5c6 translate-names Συρακούσας 1 Syracuse **Syracuse** is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 13 z2u4 translate-names Ῥήγιον 1 Rhegium **Rhegium** was a port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 13 p633 ἐπιγενομένου νότου 1 a south wind having sprung up Alternate translation: “when the wind began to blow from the south”
|
||
ACT 28 13 tz4h translate-names Ποτιόλους 1 Puteoli **Puteoli** is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 m1is οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς 1 Having found brothers there Alternate translation: “When we met fellow believers there”
|
||
ACT 28 14 n3tw figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers These **brothers** were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 a2c5 figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 we were begged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 bc3j καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν 1 and in this way, we came to Rome Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey **to Rome** was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”
|
||
ACT 28 15 k754 ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 having heard the things about us Alternate translation: “after they heard why we were there”
|
||
ACT 28 15 m9tz figs-metaphor εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος 1 having thanked God, took courage Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 se8v translate-names Ἀππίου Φόρου…Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν 1 **Forum of Appius** and **Three Taverns** were a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 16 hf2t 0 Connecting Statement: Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
|
||
ACT 28 16 fib2 figs-exclusive εἰσήλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 28 16 te8v figs-activepassive ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν 1 Paul was allowed to stay by himself If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 vf7r ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
|
||
ACT 28 17 d77z τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους 1 the most important of the Jews These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
|
||
ACT 28 17 e1dd ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here **brothers** means “fellow Jews.”
|
||
ACT 28 17 g55i ἐναντίον…τῷ λαῷ 1 opposed to the people Alternate translation: “against our people” or “against the Jews”
|
||
ACT 28 17 hgk4 figs-activepassive ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων 1 I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 x3r2 figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων 1 into the hands of the Romans Here, **hands** stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 18 fed7 τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί 1 there is no reason in me for a death penalty Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
|
||
ACT 28 19 lr96 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 28 19 zk8f ἀντιλεγόντων 1 objecting Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
|
||
ACT 28 19 n6vf figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα 1 I was forced to appeal to Caesar If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 19 e7gr figs-metonymy οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν 1 not as if I have anything to accuse my nation Here, **my nation** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 b1fd τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
|
||
ACT 28 20 pgr8 figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain Here, **bound with this chain** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 n3s7 figs-metonymy τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 of Israel Here, **Israel** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 21 x5d5 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **We** refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: [Acts 28:17](../28/17.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 28 21 y4bx οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 nor have any of the brothers come Here, **brothers** stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”
|
||
ACT 28 22 kw1d τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης 1 this sect A **sect** is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”
|
||
ACT 28 22 gy8t figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 it is known to us If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 22 j12v figs-activepassive πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται 1 it is spoken against everywhere If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 23 u7pc ταξάμενοι…οἷς…αὐτοὺς 1 Here all occurrences of the words **they** and **them** refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
|
||
ACT 28 23 q4iv ταξάμενοι…αὐτῷ ἡμέραν 1 when they had appointed a day for him Alternate translation: “when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
|
||
ACT 28 23 dg5f figs-metonymy διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 testifying about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 23 peu1 figs-metonymy τῶν προφητῶν 1 from the prophets Here, **the prophets** refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 24 pmd6 figs-activepassive καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 And some were convinced about the things which he was saying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 25 n7pm figs-metonymy εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν 1 after Paul had spoken one word Here, **word** stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 25 b11n figs-quotesinquotes καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers. This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 t5dq πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In this verse, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
|
||
ACT 28 26 qj7q figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear, but you will certainly not understand; and by seeing you will see, but you will certainly not perceive This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 pax8 ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε 1 By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see The words **hear** and **see** are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”
|
||
ACT 28 26 s1ti figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 but you will certainly not understand … but you will certainly not perceive Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 fz42 0 General Information: Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in [Acts 28:25-26](./25.md).
|
||
ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their **heart** is **dull**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 ngve figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 f5m4 figs-metaphor τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 with their ears they hardly heard, and they shut their eyes People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting **their eyes** so that they will not see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 lr99 figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 might understand with their heart Here, **heart** stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 might turn again To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically **turning** toward God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 vb9f ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them This does not mean God will only **heal** them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
|
||
ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is **sent**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen”
|
||
ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 30-31, Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 nfy5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
|
||
ACT 10 6 lt9n βυρσεῖ 1 a tanner A **tanner** is a person who makes leather from animal skins.
|